JP6945582B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine that acquires a plurality of items in response to a button press, displays a plurality of items corresponding to a notice side by side, and executes a notice corresponding to the item (see, for example, Patent Document 1). Further, there is known a gaming machine that performs a setting suggestion effect by displaying a character image when the fluctuation is stopped or when the fluctuation starts (see, for example, Patent Document 2).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-116654 Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902

However, there is a risk that the interest of the game will be lowered by performing the setting suggestion effect.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in the interest of a game.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state, bonus game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player (for example, pachinko gaming). Machine 1, slot machine, etc.), and any setting value can be set from a plurality of setting values including a disadvantage setting value and an advantage setting value that is more advantageous to the player than the disadvantage setting value. The effect executing means includes a various setting means and an effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 or the like) capable of executing the effect, and the effect executing means includes a plurality of types of advance notice effects (for example, the pseudo-ream shown in FIG. 10-1). a prediction effect, etc.), the specific display in response to announcement attraction (e.g., gift boxes image shown in Figure 10-5, the specific effect and displaying the timer image, etc.), it is possible to perform, regarding the setting means setting suggestion effect (e.g., thermal character effect like shown in FIG. 10-8 (a)) is capable of running (for example, being executable on the T11 ~ T12 as shown in FIG. 10-1 2), wherein There is a case where the specific display corresponding to the notice effect is displayed before the execution of the notice effect, and a case where the specific display corresponding to the notice effect is not displayed before the execution of the notice effect (for example, FIG. 10). see decision percentage of execution whether gift box effect shown in -7), when displaying the particular display corresponding to the prediction effect before execution of the prediction effect, the particular displayed before execution of the announcement attraction (For example, as shown in FIG. 10-6, the present box image 006SHPB-CL is changed to the present box image 006SHPB-OP), and during one variable display, the notice effect The specific effect corresponding to the advance notice effect and the setting suggestion effect can be executed, and the advance notice is when the specific display corresponding to the advance notice effect is displayed before the execution of the advance notice effect. The rate of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the specific display corresponding to the notice effect is not displayed before the effect is executed (for example, the rate of determining whether or not the present box effect shown in FIG. 10-7 is executed is determined. see), in one of the variable display, wherein the specific effect which corresponds to the informational display and the informational display, when said setting suggested effect, is performed, the specific displayed corresponding to the setting suggested effect is The setting suggestion effect is not executed when the specific display changes to the special mode, and the specific display is hidden after changing to the special mode, and after a predetermined period has elapsed, the above-mentioned The setting suggestion effect is executed .

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game. That is, if the setting suggestion effect is included as the target of the specific display, the player guesses that the setting suggestion effect does not control the advantageous state, and the player's expectation is reduced, which makes the game more enjoyable. However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, since the setting suggestion effect is not included as the target of the specific display, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

(2) The gaming machine of the above (1) is not executed when controlled to the advantageous state, and can be executed when not controlled to the advantageous state (for example, shown in FIG. 10-10). (Eye-catching effect, etc.) and the second setting suggestion effect (for example, the thermal character effect shown in FIG. 10-9) that can be executed both when the advantageous state is controlled and when the advantageous state is not controlled. And may be executable.

According to such a configuration, since it is possible to execute a plurality of types of setting suggestion effects having different executable scenes, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(3) The gaming machines of the above (1) and (2) have a plurality of types of the setting suggestion effects (for example, the thermal character effect shown in FIG. 10-9, FIG. 10-10) in which the accuracy of the suggestion regarding the setting means is different. The shown eye-catching effect, etc.) may be feasible.

According to such a configuration, since it is possible to execute a plurality of types of setting suggestion effects having different suggestion accuracy, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(4) The gaming machines of (1) to (3) above can execute variable display of identification information, and include pre-reading determination means for pre-reading whether or not the identification information is controlled to the advantageous state. It may be displayed based on the pre-reading determination (for example, the display of the present box image may be determined in the pre-reading notice setting process (step S161)).

According to such a configuration, for example, a specific display can be displayed before the start of the fluctuation based on the look-ahead determination, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

(5) The gaming machine of the above (2) can display a plurality of the specific displays (see, for example, FIGS. 10-19 (B) and 10-25 (A)), and the number of displays of the specific display is a plurality. May be more easily controlled to the advantageous state than the singular.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the number of displays of the specific display and improve the interest of the game.

(6) The gaming machines of the above (1) to (5) have a plurality of types of display modes of the specific display (see, for example, FIG. 10-5), and suggest the setting means according to the display mode of the specific display. You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the display mode of the specific display and improve the interest of the game.

(7) In the gaming machines of (1) to (6) above, the execution period of the advance notice effect (for example, the execution period of the pseudo-continuous advance notice effect of FIG. 10-11) and the execution period of the setting suggestion effect (for example). , The execution period of the thermal character effect of FIG. 10-11, etc.), the setting suggestion effect is preferentially executed over the advance notice effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (C)). "Heat" may be displayed on the front side of "re").

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the disadvantage caused by overlooking the suggestion.

(8) In the gaming machines (1) to (7) above, the determination of whether to execute the setting suggestion effect and the determination of whether to execute the advance notice effect are independently performed. For example, whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed is determined by the effect determination process B (see FIG. 10-18), and whether or not the advance notice effect is executed is determined by the effect determination process A (see FIGS. 10-15 to 10-17). You may do so.

According to such a configuration, the setting suggestion effect and the advance notice effect can be preferably executed. It also facilitates design.

(9) The gaming machines (1) to (8) above can execute the variable display of the identification information, and can execute the setting suggestion effect at a plurality of timings within the variable display period of the identification information (feature unit 006SH). 8).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to a plurality of timings and improve the interest of the game. Further, since it can be executed at a plurality of timings, it is possible to maintain the expectation that the setting suggestion effect will be executed.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko machine. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating production control commands. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of each big hit. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a fluctuation pattern determination table for big hits, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a fluctuation pattern determination table for small hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern determination table for detachment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning prize determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the random value value determination processing at the time of a prize. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the cut-in effect determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the cut-in effect determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the cut-in effect determination process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution decision ratio of the cut-in effect and the determination rate of an effect pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution decision ratio of the cut-in effect and the determination rate of an effect pattern. It is explanatory drawing of the production pattern of a cut-in effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution decision ratio in the cut-in effect pattern CI-3. It is a flowchart which shows the advance notice production decision processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution ratio of the advance notice effect and the determination rate of an effect pattern, and is explanatory drawing of the effect pattern of the advance notice effect. It is explanatory drawing of the notice production execution period for each variation pattern. It is explanatory drawing of the notice production execution period for each variation pattern. It is explanatory drawing of the notice production execution period for each variation pattern. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the advance notice effect in the variable display. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the cut-in effect in the variable display. It is a figure which shows the notification mode of the variable display result for every variation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution decision ratio of the cut-in effect and the decision rate of the effect pattern in the modification 208SG-1. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution decision ratio of the cut-in effect and the decision rate of the effect pattern in the modification 208SG-2. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution decision ratio of the cut-in effect and the decision rate of the effect pattern in the modification 208SG-3. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution decision ratio of the advance notice effect and the determination rate of an effect pattern in a modification 208SG-4. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution decision ratio of the cut-in effect and the decision rate of the effect pattern in the modification 208SG-5. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution decision ratio of the cut-in effect and the decision rate of the effect pattern in the modification 208SG-6. It is a figure which shows the execution period of the set value suggestion effect and the execution decision ratio of the set value suggestion effect in the modification 208SG-7. It is a front view of the gaming machine which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is explanatory drawing explaining the hit probability of the gaming machine which concerns on a feature part 027SH. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern of the gaming machine which concerns on a feature part 027SH. It is explanatory drawing explaining the advance notice production. This is an example of each notice production. This is an example of each notice production. It is explanatory drawing explaining the determination ratio of the advance notice production. It is explanatory drawing explaining the item image production. This is a display example of each item image. It is explanatory drawing explaining the determination ratio of the item image production. It is explanatory drawing explaining various timings. This is a specific example of various timings. This is a specific example of various timings. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect determination process in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect determination process in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is explanatory drawing explaining the setting value suggestion in the gaming machine which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is explanatory drawing explaining the setting value suggestion in the gaming machine which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is explanatory drawing explaining the advance notice production. This is an example of a notice production. It is explanatory drawing explaining the determination ratio of the advance notice production. It is explanatory drawing explaining the determination ratio of the advance notice production. This is a display example of a present box image or the like. This is a display example of a present box image or the like. It is explanatory drawing explaining the determination rate of whether or not the present box is executed. It is explanatory drawing explaining the setting suggestion effect (heat character effect, eye-catching effect). It is explanatory drawing explaining the determination rate of whether or not the heat character effect is executed. It is explanatory drawing explaining the determination ratio such as whether or not the eye-catching effect is executed. It is explanatory drawing explaining various timings. This is a specific example of various timings. This is a specific example of various timings. This is a specific example of various timings. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production decision processing A which decides about the advance notice production and the present box production. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production decision processing A which decides about the advance notice production and the present box production. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production decision processing A which decides about the advance notice production and the present box production. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect determination process B for determining a setting suggestion effect (heat character effect, eye-catching effect). It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 006SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 006SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 006SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 006SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 006SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 006SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 006SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 006SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 006SH.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the right side of the game area), a variable display (also referred to as a special figure game) of a special symbol (also referred to as a special figure) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed. The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to be performed are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Fluctuations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. When the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later is changed, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbol described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variable display.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effects images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variable display. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of stored items on hold. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

Further, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A has the number of LEDs lit. The first hold storage number is displayed, and the second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms, for example, a first starting winning opening that is always maintained in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the tip of the movable wing pieces is in a vertical position. Is close to the winning ball device 6A and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is on (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any as long as it changes between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electric tulip type accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four locations on the lower left and right sides of the game area), general winning openings 10 are provided, which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and has a large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for special electric accessory) is off, the big winning door closes the big winning door and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left side of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of the ordinary symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. An ordinary symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

Above the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3, and game effect lamps 9 for game effects are further provided around the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (not shown in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area by the striking ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, the gaming balls paid out as prize balls and the gaming balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) A hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) is provided, in which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, stick controller 31A and push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the pachinko game machine 1 by the player on the ball striking operation handle 30. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal drawing game is being executed (when the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 but the normal drawing game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The normal map game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the normal symbol (a symbol that is out of the normal symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol is "out of the normal symbol". When it becomes "per normal drawing", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (although the start prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start winning cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a jackpot symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc., which will be described later) are prepared, and the big hit is made according to these. The type is set. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained or a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as the big hit game state in some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big winning opening is opened. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened as compared with the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Controls (high opening control, high base control) that make it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening are also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probability variation state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is a state in which a “big hit” is likely to occur in addition to improving the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol.

The time saving state and the probability change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number-cutting (time-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, or a probability change state, which is advantageous for the player, and the display result in the normal drawing game is "normal drawing hit". The pachinko game machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on, such as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as (when the process is not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time saving control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, it is also called a low-accuracy high-base state in the time-saving state, a high-accuracy high-base state in the probabilistic state, and a low-accuracy low-base state in the normal state. The high-accuracy state and low-base state are also called the high-accuracy low-base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that there may be no "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, and in addition to or instead of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or the game effect lamp 9 It may be performed by the point or the like / extinguishing, the operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is a mode in which is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the pachinko game machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of a "probability change jackpot" that is controlled to a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and displayed as a stop, and the probability change state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be aligned and displayed as a stop. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability big hit" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", a fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example," 1 3 5 ”etc.) Is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state), and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative symbol may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "off", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach off") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach off"). In addition, when the display result is "off", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is changed to the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach loss"). The fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as "") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "out of reach").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution and a look-ahead notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the look-ahead notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type in the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a highly accurate state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high accuracy state and the low accuracy state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a gaming state, a small hit gaming state, a gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if a part or all of the RAM 102 is stopped from supplying power to the pachinko gaming machine 1. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be one that is updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (one that is updated by software).

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). It takes in a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a prize-winning door. To transmit.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)) and a variation pattern used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of winning, the number of stored memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing the program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed). (Including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the output voice) to the voice control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating a lamp lighting / extinguishing mode) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. It is configured to include the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, a processing of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a data protection processing of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data for advancing the game (including various flags, various timer states, etc.), as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (used by using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal or not (step). S5). In step S5, for example, the parity bit and the checksum are used to determine whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power failure that is backed up, and an effect control that specifies the display result of the special figure game that is being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may want to send a command. For these commands, the same commands that are set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command for specifying the time of recovery from the power failure, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the recovery from the power failure has been performed or the recovery from the power failure is in progress. Display the screen to do so. The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After the restoration process or the initialization process is completed and the effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of times the jackpot has occurred) and the start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information indicating the number of times of winning (information indicating the number of times of winning, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of probability change state, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like (for details, refer to the details. See below).

Following the special symbol process processing, the normal symbol process processing is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure hit". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal figure reservations is displayed by turning on the normal figure hold display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After the hold information and the number of hold storages are stored, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the judgment result such as the generation of the start winning prize, the number of hold storages, the look-ahead judgment, etc. is made to the effect control board 12. .. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set to "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when the display result is set to "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a definite special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or an outlier symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. The special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be memorized, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various determinations based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the determination value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the determination result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is set using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The process of deciding on is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. It specifies the content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol change processing, the processing for setting the special symbol to be changed in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol are performed. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "off", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "missing", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening by starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit number of executions for the round are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-opening process of the jackpot, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the jackpot has reached the set upper limit execution number, and a jackpot game state when the upper limit execution number is reached. It includes processing to make settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the post-launch processing is completed.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end processing ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This pre-opening process for small hits includes a process for setting the large winning opening to be open in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to measure the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is. When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

(Main operation of production control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. When the effect control board 12 receives the power supply voltage from the power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and press the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the LED. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the read-ahead notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, and setting for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command or the like for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, their modes, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is completed. The display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and commanding the lamp control board 14 (illumination signal). Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED according to the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the small hit game state is terminated, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the set contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the jackpot middle effect processing, for example, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the jackpot game state is to be terminated. Update to 7 ”and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process ends.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a pay-out type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the gaming media are enclosed and points are given based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko game machine 1 is shown as a game machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player When a symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, if the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the programs and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a proportion of "0%" and the other may have a proportion of "100%" or less than "100%".
(Explanation of feature section 208SG)

Next, the gaming machine in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-1 to 8-27.

First, FIG. 8-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, and shows the arrangement layout of the main members. As shown in FIGS. 8-1 and 8-3, the pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame 208SG001a formed in a vertically long square frame shape and a gaming board (gauge) constituting the game board surface. It is composed of a board) 2 and a game machine frame (underframe) 208SG003 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area. Further, in the game machine frame 208SG003, between the door opening position where the glass door frame 208SG003a having a glass window opens the front surface of the game machine frame 208SG003 centering on the left side and the door closing position which closes the front surface. It is rotatably provided, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 208SG003a, and when the glass door frame 208SG003a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

Further, the gaming machine frame 208SG003 can be opened by inserting the door key owned by the clerk of the game hall into a lock (not shown) and unlocking it, and the game machine frame 208SG003 and the glass can be opened by players other than the clerk. The door frame 208SG003a cannot be opened.

The left game area 208SG002L is a game area in which the (left-handed) game ball launched relatively weakly by the operation of the ball striking operation handle 30 flows down, and the right game area 208SG002R is the left game area 208SG002L by the operation of the ball striking operation handle 30. This is a game area in which a (right-handed) game ball launched more strongly than the game ball flowing down passes through the upper path 208SG002C of the image display device 5 and flows down.

Further, a general winning opening 10 is arranged in the left game area 208SG002L, and in the right game area 208SG002R, a passing gate 41, a variable winning ball device 6B, and a general winning ball device 6B are arranged from the upstream side to the downstream side of the right game area 208SG002R. A winning opening 10 and a special variable winning ball device 7 are arranged. That is, the game ball flowing down the left game area 208SG002L can win a prize in the first starting winning opening formed by the general winning opening 10 and the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 208SG002R is variable. It is possible to win a prize in the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, the general winning opening 10, and the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, and it is possible to pass through the passing gate 41.

As shown in FIG. 8-1, a plurality of obstacle nails 208SGK1 are arranged between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B, and the special variable winning ball device 7. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the left game area 208SG002L cannot win the second start winning opening or the large winning opening, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 208SG002R cannot win the first starting winning opening. It has become.

As shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3, the main substrate 11 in the feature portion 208SG of the present embodiment is housed in the substrate case 208SG201 which is configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. It is mounted on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the state. Further, on the main board 11, a lock switch 208SG051 for switching the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a changeable set value change state, a jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) described later in the set value change state, and the like are used. A setting changeover switch 208SG052 that functions as a setting switch for changing a set value, and an open sensor 208SG090 that detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 208SG003 are provided. The set value change state in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment is also a state in which a clerk of the game hall or the like can confirm the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (set value confirmation state).

The setting switching main body unit provided with the operation unit that can be operated by the player such as the lock switch 208SG051 and the setting changeover switch 208SG052 is housed in the board case 208SG201 together with the main board 11, and the lock switch 208SG051 and the setting changeover switch 208SG052. Is exposed to the back side through an opening formed in the back surface of the board case 208SG201 so that it can be operated without opening the board case 208SG201.

Since the board case 208SG201 having the lock switch 208SG051 and the setting changeover switch 208SG052 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to operate the gaming machine frame 208SG003 in the closed state, and a predetermined door key is pressed. It can be operated by opening the gaming machine frame 208SG003. Further, since the lock switch 208SG051 requires the operation of the setting key owned by the clerk of the amusement park or the like, only the clerk who possesses the setting key can operate the lock switch 208SG051. Further, the lock switch 208SG051 is also a switch capable of executing an ON / OFF switching operation described later by a setting key. Although the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which the door key and the setting key are separate keys, one key may be used in combination.

Further, in the board case 208SG201, a display monitor 208SG029 capable of displaying a set value and a base value described later is arranged. The display monitor 208SG029 is connected to the main board 11 and is arranged on the upper part of the board case 208SG201. That is, the display monitor 208SG029 is arranged in front of the main board 11 in the board case 208SG201 when visually recognizing it. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the gaming machine frame 208SG003 is not opened, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized is the back surface side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame 208SG003 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 208SG, if the lock switch 208SG051 and the release sensor 208SG09 are turned on when the power is turned on, the set value is changed and the set value is displayed on the display monitor 208SG029. Is displayed. At this time, by operating the setting changeover switch 208SG052, the numerical value (set value) displayed on the display monitor 208SG029 can be updated and displayed.

Then, by turning off the lock switch 208SG051 while any numerical value from 1 to 6 is displayed on the display monitor 208SG029, the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 208SG029 is set as a new set value. NS. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the CPU 103 sends a setting value designation command, which will be described later, to the effect control board 12 regardless of whether or not a new setting value is set (set). By doing so, the effect control CPU 120 can specify the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the set value designation command.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-1 and 8-2, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a predetermined position (for example, a lower left position of the gaming area) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature portion 208SG of the present embodiment. 1 First special symbol display device 208SG004A capable of variable display of 1 special figure, 2nd special symbol display device 208SG004B capable of executing variable display of 2nd special figure, 1st hold display capable of displaying 1st hold storage number Device 208SG025A, 2nd hold indicator 208SG025B capable of displaying the 2nd hold storage number, normal symbol display 208SG020 capable of executing variable display of the normal symbol, normal figure hold indicator 208SG025C capable of displaying the normal symbol hold storage number, In the game state where the round display 208SG131 that can display the number of rounds (big hit type) of the big hit game during the big hit game, and the game ball such as the high base state (time saving state) or the big hit game state is launched toward the right game area 208SG002R. A game information display unit 208SG200 is provided in which a right-handed lamp 208SG 132 that lights up, a probability variation lamp 208SG 133 that lights up in the probability variation state, and a time reduction lamp 208SG 134 that lights up in the high base state (time reduction state) are collectively arranged.

The first special symbol display device 208SG004A and the second special symbol display device 208SG004B are each composed of 8-segment LEDs. Further, in the first special symbol display device 208SG004A and the second special symbol display device 208SG004B, when the variable display result of the special symbol is out of place or a small hit, the variable display result can be derived and displayed by a common combination. ing.

In the case where the variable display result is a big hit in the variable display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol display device 208SG004A has a variable display result with two types of big hit symbols (combination of lit LEDs) for each big hit type. Derived display is possible. Further, in the case where the variable display result is a big hit in the variable display of the second special symbol, the second special symbol display device 208SG004B is variablely displayed by two kinds of big hit symbols (combination of lit LEDs) for each big hit type. The results can be derived and displayed.

In the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 208SG004A and the second special symbol display device 208SG004B are all different, but the first special symbol display device 208SG004A At least a part of the jackpot symbol that can be derived and displayed in the above and the jackpot symbol that can be derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 208SG004B may overlap.

In the first hold indicator 208SG025A and the second hold indicator 208SG025B, LEDs of four segments are arranged in parallel in the left-right direction. In these first hold indicator 208SG025A and second hold indicator 208SG025B, if the number of hold storage is one, only the LED at the left end is lit, and each time the number of hold storage increases, it is the second from the left. The third LED from the left and the fourth LED from the left light up in sequence. Then, each time the variable display is executed, the LED on the hold display corresponding to the variable display is set in a predetermined shift direction (feature of the present embodiment) in response to the decrease (consumption) of the hold memory. In part 208SG, the lights are turned off toward the left).

In the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, when both the first special figure holding memory and the second special figure holding storage exist, the variable display based on the second special figure holding storage is preferentially executed. It has become like. Therefore, for example, when one first special figure hold memory exists and two second special figure hold memories exist (only the LED at the left end of the first hold indicator 208SG025A is lit and the second hold is held. (When the two LEDs on the left of the display 208SG25B are lit), the first special figure hold is held after the second special figure hold memory becomes 0 by executing the variable display based on the second special figure hold memory. Variable display based on memory is executed.

Further, the round display 208SG131 is composed of five segments (LEDs). As the jackpot types in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, a total of three jackpot types are provided: a jackpot A which is a 5-round jackpot, a jackpot B which is a 10-round jackpot, and a jackpot C which is a 15-round jackpot. Therefore, which segment of the segments constituting the round display 208SG131 is lit differs depending on the jackpot type.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control the image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. And LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of decorative LEDs and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment includes a first movable body 208SG321 and a second movable body 208SG322 that can operate between the origin position and the effect position during variable display and the like. The origin detection sensor 208SG331 that can detect that the 1 movable body 208SG321 is located at the origin position of the first movable body 208SG321 and the second movable body 208SG322 are located at the origin position of the second movable body 208SG322. The origin detection sensor 208SG332 capable of detecting this is connected to the origin detection sensor 208SG332.

FIG. 8-4 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the feature unit 208SG in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 8-4 (A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), the command 8001H is a first variable display start command for designating the start of variable display in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 208SG004A. .. The command 8002H is a second variable display start command for designating the start of the variable display in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 208SG004B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a fluctuation pattern specification command that specifies a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of instruction by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be specified.

The command 8CXXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (B), the determination result (predetermined result) of whether the variable display result is "missing", "big hit", or "small hit". ) Or, different EXT data are set according to the determination result (big hit type determination result) of which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is set when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (B), the command 8C00H is the first variable display result designation command indicating a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “missing”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit A" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit B" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit C" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the predetermined result that the variable display result is a "small hit".

The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the change stop (confirmation) of the decorative symbol in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to, for example, the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state specification command corresponding to the game state (low base state, normal state) in which the time reduction control is not performed, and the command 9501H is the game state (high base state) in which the time reduction control is performed. , Time saving state) is used as the second game state specification command.

The command 96XXH is an error (abnormal) designation command that specifies the occurrence of an error (abnormality) and the type of the error (abnormality) that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the error (abnormality) designation command, for example, by setting the EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is specified which error (abnormality) has been determined on the effect control board 12 side. The occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) can be notified by the error notification process described later.

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a “fanfare command”) that specifies the display of an effect image indicating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The command A1XXH is a notification command during the opening of the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determination result and the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. .. In the notification command during opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after opening of the big winning opening, different EXT data are set according to the number of round executions (for example, "1" to "15") in the big hit game state or the small hit game state. Will be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. This is a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 208SG004A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. , The second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 208SG004B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first hold storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure hold storage number in order to display the special figure hold storage number identifiable on the image display device 5 or the like. The command C2XXH is a second hold storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure hold storage number in order to display the special figure hold storage number identifiable on the image display device 5 or the like. The first hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Further, the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command are used in the special figure game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the hold storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command, the total hold storage number notification command for notifying the total hold storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total hold storage number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) of the total hold storage number.

The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (commands for designating a winning determination result) indicating the contents of the winning determination result. Of these, the command C4XXH is a symbol designation command that indicates whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit" and the judgment result of the big hit type (probability change, non-probability change, or sudden change) as the judgment result at the time of winning. Further, the command C6XXH is a variation category indicating a determination result of whether the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is the variation pattern of "non-reach", "super reach", or "other" as the determination result at the time of winning. It is a command.

The command D0XXH is a setting value designation command for designating the newly set set value from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120).

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which is a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing game control programs, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a game control program to perform control operations, and an update of numerical data indicating a random value independently of the CPU 103. It is configured to include a random number circuit 104 to perform, an I / O (Input / Output port) 105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by executing the program read from the ROM 101 by the CPU 103. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, a variable data writing operation in which the CPU 103 writes various variable data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores them, and various variable data temporarily stored in the RAM 102 by the CPU 103. The variable data read operation, the CPU 103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation that outputs various signals is also performed.

FIG. 8-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the main board 11. As shown in FIG. 8-5, in the feature unit 208SG of this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the fluctuation pattern. Numerical data indicating each of the random value MR3 for determination, the random value MR4 for determining the display result of the general map, and the random value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 is controlled so as to be countable. In addition, a random number value other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

In the present embodiment, each random value MR1 to MR5 is used as a value in the range shown in FIG. 8-5, but the present invention is not limited to this, and each random value is not limited to this. The range of MR1 to MR5 may be different depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

FIG. 8-6 shows the fluctuation pattern in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "off", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" and "reach", respectively, and is variable. A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to a case where the display result is a "big hit". In addition, one variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the variable display result is a "small hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern"). The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "out of reach" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "out of reach variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the missed fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “off”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is called a big hit fluctuation pattern. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit" is called a small hit fluctuation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed, and a super reach in which a super reach effect such as super reach α, super reach β, super reach γ, and super reach δ is executed. There is a fluctuation pattern. In the present embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and like the super reach, the normal reach α, the normal reach β, ... A plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Further, the super reach variation pattern may be provided with 5 or more super reach variation patterns.

As shown in FIG. 8-6, the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment is the super reach fluctuation pattern, super reach α and super reach β. , Super reach γ, and super reach δ are set shorter. Further, regarding the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach production of super reach such as super reach α, super reach β, super reach γ, and super reach δ in the feature portion 208SG of the present embodiment is executed, the super reach The special figure fluctuation pattern is set longer in the order of δ, super reach γ, super reach β, and super reach α.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the variable display result is set to be "big hit" in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach. Therefore, since the big hit expectation is set to be high, the normal reach fluctuation pattern and In the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

However, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, as a fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ, the variable display result is notified that the variable display result is a big hit after once notifying that the variable display result is out of order as the reach effect of the super reach γ. A variation pattern (PB1-5 shown in FIG. 8-6) for executing the revival effect is provided. Therefore, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ that executes the revival effect is set to have a longer special figure fluctuation time than the normal fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ and a shorter special figure fluctuation time than the fluctuation pattern of the super reach δ. However, it is an exceptionally high fluctuation pattern (100%) with the highest expectation of big hits.

In addition, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are classified into, for example, non-reach type, normal reach type, super reach type, and the like. Instead of determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type after determining first, only the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is determined without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern type is provided to determine these fluctuations. The type of the variation pattern may be determined first from the random value for determining the pattern type, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-6, the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which the fluctuation content (effect content) is predetermined for each fluctuation pattern, but the present invention illustrates this. The variation content (effect content) may be different depending on the set value, even if the variation pattern is the same. For example, in the case of the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 that is out of normal reach, if the set value is 1, the fluctuation pattern is out of normal reach, and if the set value is 2, a pseudo-continuous effect is performed. As a fluctuation pattern that is executed twice and becomes non-reach out of reach, when the set value is 3, the pseudo-continuous effect may be executed three times to make a fluctuation pattern that is out of super reach.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, and by using the RAM 102 as a work area, various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are executed. Further, the CPU 103 is capable of generating all of the various random numbers used on the side of the main board 11 by executing the random number generation program.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data that constitutes a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 8-7 to 8-14, which are prepared by the CPU 103 for performing various determinations and determinations. Further, the ROM 101 contains table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation mode of each symbol in a variable display such as a special symbol or a normal symbol. A fluctuation pattern table or the like that stores a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIGS. 8-7 and 8-8, and the second special figure display result determination shown in FIGS. 8-9 and 8-10. Table, jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. 8-11 (A), jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 8-11 (B), and jackpot fluctuation pattern determination A table, a small hit variation pattern determination table, an outlier variation pattern determination table, a general map display result determination table (not shown), a general map variation pattern determination table (not shown), and the like are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment is configured such that the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing described later, the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is changed by using the display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the set value. .. The set value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is. In other words, as for the set value, 6 which is the largest value is the most disadvantageous value for the amusement park side, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is the more advantageous value for the amusement park side. Become.

8-7 to 8-10 are explanatory views showing a display result determination table. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set for each set value. In the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, as the display result determination table, individual display result determination tables are used for the first special figure and the second special figure, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure may be used.

In FIG. 8-7 (A), the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 1, and the gaming state is the normal state (low probability low base state) or the time saving state (low probability high base state). This is a display result determination table for the first special figure selected in a certain case. In the first special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1237 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

FIG. 8-7 (B) is the first special figure selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 1, and the gaming state is the probabilistic state (high probability high base state). Display result judgment table. In the first special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1346 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

In FIG. 8-7 (C), the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 2, and the gaming state is the normal state (low accuracy low base state) or the time saving state (low accuracy high base state). This is a display result determination table for the first special figure selected in a certain case. In the first special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1253 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

FIG. 8-7 (D) is the first special figure selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 2, and the gaming state is the probabilistic state (high probability high base state). Display result judgment table. In the first special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1383 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

In FIG. 8-7 (E), the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 3, and the gaming state is the normal state (low accuracy low base state) or the time saving state (low accuracy high base state). This is a display result determination table for the first special figure selected in a certain case. In the first special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1272 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

FIG. 8-7 (F) is the first special figure selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 3, and the gaming state is the probabilistic state (high probability high base state). Display result judgment table. In the first special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1429 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

In FIG. 8-8 (A), the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 4, and the gaming state is the normal state (low probability low base state) or the time saving state (low probability high base state). This is a display result determination table for the first special figure selected in a certain case. In the first special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1292 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

FIG. 8-8 (B) is the first special figure selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 4, and the gaming state is the probabilistic state (high probability high base state). Display result judgment table. In the first special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1487 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33049 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

In FIG. 8-8 (C), the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 5, and the gaming state is the normal state (low accuracy low base state) or the time saving state (low accuracy high base state). This is a display result determination table for the first special figure selected in a certain case. In the first special figure display result judgment table, among the hit judgment values that are numerical values that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1317 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

FIG. 8-8 (D) is the first special figure selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 5, and the gaming state is the probabilistic state (high probability high base state). Display result judgment table. In the first special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1556 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

In FIG. 8-8 (E), the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 6, and the gaming state is the normal state (low probability low base state) or the time saving state (low probability high base state). This is a display result determination table for the first special figure selected in a certain case. In the first special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1346 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

FIG. 8-8 (F) is the first special figure selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 6, and the gaming state is the probabilistic state (high probability high base state). Display result judgment table. In the first special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1674 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

In FIG. 8-9 (A), the variable special figure is the second special figure, the set value is 1, and the gaming state is the normal state (low probability low base state) or the time saving state (low probability high base state). This is a display result determination table for the second special figure selected in a certain case. In the second special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1237 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

FIG. 8-9 (B) is the second special figure selected when the variable special figure is the second special figure, the set value is 1, and the gaming state is the probabilistic state (high probability high base state). Display result judgment table. In the second special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1346 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

In FIG. 8-9 (C), the variable special figure is the second special figure, the set value is 2, and the gaming state is the normal state (low accuracy low base state) or the time saving state (low accuracy high base state). This is a display result determination table for the first special figure selected in a certain case. In the second special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1253 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

FIG. 8-9 (D) is the second special figure selected when the variable special figure is the second special figure, the set value is 2, and the gaming state is the probabilistic state (high probability high base state). Display result judgment table. In the second special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1383 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

In FIG. 8-9 (E), the variable special figure is the second special figure, the set value is 3, and the gaming state is the normal state (low accuracy low base state) or the time saving state (low accuracy high base state). This is a display result determination table for the second special figure selected in a certain case. In the second special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1272 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place".

FIG. 8-9 (F) is the second special figure selected when the variable special figure is the second special figure, the set value is 3, and the gaming state is the probabilistic state (high probability high base state). Display result judgment table. In the second special figure display result judgment table, among the hit judgment values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1429 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

In FIG. 8-10 (A), the variable special figure is the second special figure, the set value is 4, and the gaming state is the normal state (low accuracy low base state) or the time saving state (low accuracy high base state). This is a display result determination table for the second special figure selected in a certain case. In the second special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1292 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place".

FIG. 8-10 (B) is the second special figure selected when the variable special figure is the second special figure, the set value is 4, and the gaming state is the probabilistic state (high probability high base state). Display result judgment table. In the second special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1487 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

In FIG. 8-10 (C), the variable special figure is the second special figure, the set value is 5, and the gaming state is the normal state (low accuracy low base state) or the time saving state (low accuracy high base state). This is a display result determination table for the second special figure selected in a certain case. In the second special figure display result judgment table, among the hit judgment values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1317 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

FIG. 8-10 (D) is the second special figure selected when the variable special figure is the second special figure, the set value is 5, and the gaming state is the probabilistic state (high probability high base state). Display result judgment table. In the second special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1556 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

In FIG. 8-10 (E), the variable special figure is the second special figure, the set value is 6, and the gaming state is the normal state (low accuracy low base state) or the time saving state (low accuracy high base state). This is a display result determination table for the second special figure selected in a certain case. In the second special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1346 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

FIG. 8-10 (F) is the first special figure selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 6, and the gaming state is the probabilistic state (high probability high base state). Display result judgment table. In the first special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1674 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

As described above, in each display result judgment table, when the game state is in the probability change state (high probability state), more judgment values than in the normal state or the time saving state are the special figures of "big hit". It is assigned to the display result. As a result, in the probabilistic state in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 performs probabilistic change control, the probability that it is determined to control the special figure display result as a "big hit" in the big hit game state in the normal state or the time saving state (the present embodiment). In the feature unit 208SG of, 1/300 when the set value is 1, 1/280 when the set value is 2, 1/260 when the set value is 3, and 1/240 when the set value is 4. Compared to 1/220 when the set value is 5 and 1/200 when the set value is 6, the probability that the special figure display result will be controlled as a "big hit" and controlled to the big hit gaming state is higher (this). In the feature unit 208SG of the embodiment, when the set value is 1, 1/200, when the set value is 2, 1/180, when the set value is 3, 1/160, and when the set value is 4, 1 / 140, 1/120 when the set value is 5, 1/100 when the set value is 6). That is, in each display result determination table, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probabilistic state, the probability of being determined to control the jackpot gaming state is higher than in the normal state or the time saving state. , The determination value is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state.

In the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-7 to 8-10, the multiplication factor of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state is different according to each set value. Different (for example, if the set value is 1, the probability variation of the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is 1.5 times, and if the setting value is 2, the probability variation with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is 1.5 times. The jackpot probability multiplier in the state is about 1.56 times, and if the set value is 3, the jackpot probability multiplier in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is 1.625 times). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the multiplication factor of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state at each set value is constant (for example, 5 times). ) May be set.

Further, in each of the first special figure display result determination tables, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment values are assigned as follows. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-7 and 8-8, in the first special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is set as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or the set value. The probability of being determined to control the small hit game state is set to 1/200.

On the other hand, in each display result determination table for the second special figure, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the first special regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment values are assigned so that the values are the same as those in the display result judgment table for figures. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-9 and 8-10, in the display result determination table for the second special figure, the special figure display result is set as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or the set value. The probability of being determined to control the small hit game state is set to 1/100.

It should be noted that the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the probability of being determined to control the small hit game state with the special figure display result as "small hit" is the same regardless of the set value. The present invention is not limited to this, and the probability of being determined to control the small hit game state with the special figure display result as a "small hit" may be different depending on the set value. Further, the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" and the small hit gaming state is different according to the variable special map. The invention is not limited to this, and the probability of being determined to control the small hit gaming state with the special figure display result as a "small hit" may be the same probability regardless of the variable special map.

Here, focusing on the numerical range of the hit judgment values assigned to "big hit" and "small hit" in each display result judgment table, the display result for the first special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. In the determination table, the range from 1024 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the value is in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1. Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical value among the big hit judgment values is common. Numerical values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). go.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is to determine the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value of. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values from 102 to 1346 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is 32767 to 33094 with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1346) in the case of the set value 6. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

Next, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the probability change state, the range from 102 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the set value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the set value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for the set value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, the value can be taken in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1. Of the hit judgment values, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical range of the big hit judgment values is set. Numerical values within the range including the non-common numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1347 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). go.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit determination value is the same as the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of these, the range from 32767 to 33094 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, 1020 to 1674 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is 32767 to 33094 with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1674) in the case of the set value 6. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result judgment table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment values is the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the value is in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1. Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical value among the big hit judgment values is common. Numerical values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). go.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is to determine the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value of. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values from 102 to 1346 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is 32767 to 33421 with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1346) in the case of the set value 6. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

Next, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the probability change state, the range from 102 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the set value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the set value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for the set value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for FIG. 2 when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, when the set value is 1, the value can be taken in the range of 0 to 65535. Of the judgment values, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the big hit judgment values are not included in the common numerical range. Numerical values within the range including the common numerical value range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1347 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). go.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit determination value is the same as the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of these, the range from 32767 to 33421 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, 1020 to 1674 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is 32767 to 33421 with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1674) in the case of the set value 6. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

As described above, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, in each display result determination table, regardless of the game state and the set value, the common numerical range or the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set based on the hit determination value 1020. The judgment value included in the continuous numerical range of 1 is set as the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and the continuous numerical range of 1 is based on the hit judgment value of 32767 regardless of the game state and the set value (common). The variable display result is judged by using the judgment value included in the numerical range) as the numerical range of the small hit judgment value.

Further, in each of these display result judgment tables, when the fluctuation special figures are the same, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same regardless of the game state (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is Same). Further, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value differs depending on whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure (small in the display result judgment table for the first special figure). While the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the hit judgment value is 328, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the display result judgment table for the second special figure is about 655. On the other hand, the numerical range itself of the small hit determination value is set with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value).

Further, as described above, in each gaming state, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, there is a probability that it is determined that the special figure display result is controlled to the jackpot gaming state as the "big hit". Judgment values are assigned so that the lower the value and the larger the value of the set value, the higher the probability that the special figure display result will be determined to be controlled to the jackpot gaming state as "big hit" (big hit probability: set value 6> set value). 5> Set value 4> Set value 3> Set value 2> Set value 1).

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and when the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the jackpot, the CPU 103 hits the jackpot (big hit) with respect to the special symbol. It is decided to be A to jackpot C). Further, when MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is decided with the probability according to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 8-7 to 8-10 indicates the probability of a big hit (ratio) and the probability of a small hit (ratio). Further, determining whether or not to make a jackpot means determining whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 208SG004A or the second special symbol display device 208SG004B is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control the small hit gaming state, but the stop at the first special symbol display device 208SG004A or the second special symbol display device 208SG004B. It also means deciding whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

In the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, a total of 6 set values of 1 to 6 are provided as set values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The set value that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more.

8-11 (A) and 8-11 (B) are explanatory views showing a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. Is. Of these, FIG. 8-11 (A) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). It is a table when you do. Further, FIG. 8-11 (B) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening (that is, when the second special symbol is variably displayed). It is a table of cases.

In the jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the jackpot type is selected from jackpot A to jackpot C based on the random number (MR2) for determining the jackpot type. It is a table referenced to determine.

Here, the jackpot type in the feature portion 208SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-12. In the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, as the jackpot type, the jackpot A (also referred to as non-probability variable jackpot) in which only the time saving control is executed after the end of the jackpot game state and the game shifts to the low probability high base state, and the jackpot game After the end, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control are executed, and the jackpot B and the jackpot C (also referred to as the probabilistic jackpot) for shifting to the high-accuracy high-base state are set.

The jackpot game state by "big hit A" is a normally open jackpot that is repeatedly executed five times (so-called five rounds) that change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state that is advantageous to the player, and is a "big hit". The jackpot game state by "B" is a normal open jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player. Further, the big hit game state by the "big hit C" is a normal open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 15 times (so-called 15 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player.

The time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state by the "big hit A" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment), or the special figure game of the predetermined number of times is executed. Figure Ends when the game is in a jackpot game state before the game is executed.

On the other hand, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the jackpot B or the jackpot C are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Therefore, when the big hit that occurs again is the big hit B or the big hit C, the high accuracy control and the time saving control are executed again after the end of the big hit game state, so that the big hit game state is continuous without going through the normal state. It becomes a so-called consecutive villa state that occurs in.

In the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, a mode in which three types of jackpot A to jackpot C are provided as jackpot types is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is 2. There may be less than one type, or four or more types.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-11 (A), in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), 0 to 99 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 is assigned to the jackpot A. 100 to 249 are assigned to jackpot B, and 250 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8-11 (B), in the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol), 0 to 99 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 is assigned to jackpot A. 100 to 199 are assigned to jackpot B, and 200 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. That is, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the jackpot type differs depending on whether the winning opening in which the game ball has won is the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. , The jackpot type is determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

In the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot type is determined by using MR2 which is a random value for determining the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is not limited to this. It may be determined using MR1 which is a random value for determining the special figure display result.

Further, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the variation pattern can be selected from the plurality of types described above according to the predetermined determination result. Determine to one of the fluctuation patterns of.

Specifically, as the fluctuation pattern judgment table, the fluctuation pattern judgment table for big hits used when it is predetermined to set the variable display result to "big hit" and the variable display result to be "small hit". A fluctuation pattern judgment table for big hits used when it is pre-determined, and a fluctuation pattern judgment table for misses used when it is pre-determined to make the variable display result "off" are prepared in advance. ing.

In the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3), and the revival effect are executed. Not super reach γ jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-4), super reach γ jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-5) to execute revival effect, super reach δ jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-6) On the other hand, a predetermined random number value is assigned as the determination value in the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-13 (A), in the jackpot variation pattern determination table, 1 to 50 of the MR3 determination value ranges 1 to 997 are normal reach jackpot variation patterns (PB1). -1) is assigned, 51 to 200 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 201 to 400 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). It is assigned, and 401 to 650 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot (PB1-4) that does not execute the resurrection effect, and 651 to 700 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot that executes the resurrection effect. It is assigned to (PB1-5), and 701 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-6) of the super reach δ jackpot.

Further, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the fluctuation pattern for big hits is determined by using the fluctuation pattern determination table of 1, that is, the pachinko. Although the embodiment in which the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern is the same when the variable display result is a big hit regardless of the set value set in the gaming machine 1, the present invention is not limited to this. , The determination ratio of each fluctuation pattern may be different for each set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Further, in the variation pattern determination table for small hits, a predetermined random number value is a determination value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take with respect to the variation pattern of the variation pattern (PC1-1) for small hits. Is assigned as. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-13 (B), in the variation pattern determination table for small hits, the variation pattern of small hits from 0 to 997 in the range 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 ( It is assigned to PC1-1). Although only PC1-1 is provided as the variation pattern of the small hit in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation pattern of the small hit is 2 or more. Fluctuation pattern of may be provided.

Further, the deviation pattern determination table includes the deviation pattern determination table A used when the number of reserved storages is 1 or less in the low base state in which the game state is not subjected to the time reduction control, and the low base. The deviation pattern determination table B used when the total number of reserved storages is 2 to 4 in the state, and the deviation variation used when the total number of reserved storages is 5 to 8 in the low base state. A pattern determination table C and a variation pattern determination table D for deviation used when the game state is a high base state in which time reduction control is performed are prepared in advance.

In the deviation pattern determination table A, the non-reach deviation variation pattern without shortening (PA1-1), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and the super Random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is taken for the fluctuation pattern of reach β off (PA2-3), the fluctuation pattern of super reach γ off (PA2-4), and the fluctuation pattern of super reach δ off (PA2-5). A predetermined random number value is assigned as a judgment value in the possible range.

As shown in FIG. 8-14 (A), in the deviation pattern determination table A (for low-base medium total hold storage number of 1 or less), 1 to 450 out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997. Are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), 451 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 850 are out of super reach α. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 851 to 930 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of super reach β, and 931 to 970 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2) out of super reach γ. -4) is assigned, and 971 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-5) out of super reach δ.

Further, in the deviation pattern determination table B, the shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-2), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super Reach α out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) Super reach γ out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-4), super reach δ out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-5) On the other hand, a predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value.

As shown in FIG. 8-14 (B), in the deviation pattern determination table B (for 2 to 4 low-base medium total pending storage numbers), 1 to 1 of the MR3 determination value ranges 1 to 997. Up to 500 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), 501 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 850 are out of super reach α. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), 851 to 930 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of super reach β, and 931 to 970 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of super reach γ. It is assigned to PA2-4), and 971 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-5) out of super reach δ.

Further, in the deviation pattern determination table C, the shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-3), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super Fluctuation pattern of reach α off (PA2-2), fluctuation pattern of super reach β off (PA2-3), fluctuation pattern of super reach γ off (PA2-4), fluctuation pattern of super reach δ off (PS2-5) On the other hand, a predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value.

As shown in FIG. 8-14 (C), in the deviation pattern determination table C (for low-base medium total hold storage number of 5 or more), 1 to 550 out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997. Are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 850 are out of super reach α. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 851 to 930 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of super reach β, and 931 to 970 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2) out of super reach γ. -4) is assigned, and 971 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-5) out of super reach δ.

Further, in the deviation pattern determination table D, the shortening non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-4), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach α deviation variation pattern corresponding to the time reduction control are performed. (PA2-2), fluctuation pattern of super reach β out of alignment (PA2-3), fluctuation pattern of super reach γ out of alignment (PA2-4), fluctuation pattern of super reach δ out of alignment (PA2-5) A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value in the range that the MR3 can take.

As shown in FIG. 8-14 (D), in the deviation pattern determination table D (for high base and medium), 1 to 550 of the judgment value ranges 1 to 997 of MR3 are non-reach deviation variations. It is assigned to the pattern (PA1-4), and 551 to 700 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), and 701 to 850 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2). 851 to 930 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach β out of order (PA2-3), and 931 to 970 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach γ out of order (PA2-4). The numbers 971 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-5) out of the super reach δ.

As described above, when the deviation pattern determination tables A to D are used, the ratio for determining the non-reach variation pattern and the normal reach variation pattern is set higher than the ratio for determining the super reach variation pattern. When the deviation pattern determination tables A to D are used, 701 to 850 of the determination values are the fluctuation patterns of the super reach α deviation, and 851 to 930 are the deviation patterns of the super reach β, regardless of the fluctuation pattern determination table. Fluctuation patterns, 931 to 970 are assigned to the fluctuation patterns of the super reach γ, and 971 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation patterns of the super reach δ, that is, when the variable display result is out of alignment, the super reach Since the fluctuation pattern is determined by a common determination ratio, it is possible to prevent the effect from being lowered due to the variable display according to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach not being executed.

In the feature portion 208SG of the present embodiment, as the deviation pattern, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α deviation, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β deviation, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ deviation, and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach δ deviation Although the respective determination ratios exemplify the completely same form between the set values, the present invention is not limited to this, and these fluctuation patterns of the super reach α deviation and the fluctuation of the super reach β deviation are illustrated. The determination ratios of the pattern, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ deviation, and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach δ deviation may be different for each set value.

In the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display result is out of alignment, the embodiment in which the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is the same is illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this. If the variable display result is out of order, the determination ratios of all the fluctuation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach may be the same, and the fluctuation of either non-reach and normal reach may be the same. Only the pattern determination rate may be the same.

The non-reach non-reach variation pattern (PA1-2) has a shorter variation time than the non-reach non-reach variation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, and the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-2) is more non-reach. The deviation pattern (PA1-3) has a shorter fluctuation time (see FIG. 8-6). Therefore, when the number of reserved memories increases, the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time is determined, so that the reserved memories are easily digested, and the number of reserved memories reaches the upper limit of 4. By winning a start prize while the player is in the game, it becomes difficult for a useless start prize that is not stored on hold to occur. By determining the pattern (PA1-1), the variable display time becomes longer, so that it is possible to prevent the game from being less interesting due to the variable display not being executed.

Further, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-14 (A) to 8-14 (C), variations are made using a variation pattern determination table for deviation, which differs depending on the total number of reserved storages. Although the form of determining the pattern is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of reserved memories in the special symbol to be changed (for example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the first is the first. The variation pattern may be determined using a variation pattern determination table for deviation, which differs depending on the number of reservations of the special symbol and the number of reservations of the second special symbol when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

Further, the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which there is a one-to-one correspondence between whether or not to execute the reach effect and which reach effect is to be executed for each determined fluctuation pattern. The present invention is not limited to this, and whether or not the effect control CPU 120 executes the reach effect based on the special figure variation time of the variation pattern, the variable display result, etc., and which reach effect is executed. You may decide whether to do it by lottery.

The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 8-1 may be a backup RAM in which a part or all of the RAM 102 is backed up by a backup power source created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 are stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied with power). NS. In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as the special figure process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for recovering the control state before the occurrence of the power failure or the like based on the data when the data is restored after the power failure or the like occurs. Further, the data corresponding to the control state and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as the data indicating the progress state of the game.

Such a RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area (not shown) as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game control data holding area includes a first special figure holding storage unit, a second special drawing holding storage unit, a normal drawing holding storage unit, a game control flag setting unit, a game control timer setting unit, and a game control counter. It has a setting unit and a game control buffer setting unit.

The first special figure reservation storage unit is a special figure in which the game ball passes (enters) through the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting prize (first starting winning) is generated, but has not yet been started. The reserved data of the game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 208SG004A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number with the first starting winning opening, and satisfies the first starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on , Store until the number of stored items reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game. ) Will be the pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

In the second special figure reservation storage unit, the game ball passes (enters) through the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, and a starting winning (second starting winning) is generated, but the special drawing has not been started yet. The reserved data of the figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 208SG004B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number with the second starting winning opening, and satisfies the second starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on , Store until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game. ) Will be the pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

It should be noted that the hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) through the first start winning opening and the game ball passing (entering) through the second start winning opening. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit. In this case, the start port data indicating which of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed (entered) may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the hold number. ..

The normal figure hold storage unit stores the hold information of the normal figure game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 208SG020 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the normal figure hold storage unit is associated with the hold number in the order in which the game balls pass through the passage gate 41, and is for determining the normal figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 of the above is set as pending data, and is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

The game control flag setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can update the state according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 103 to count a part or all of the game random numbers so that they can be updated by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit, a random number value not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating the random number values MR2 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and periodically according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random number value is updated targetly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. It may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on all or a part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

Further, the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 is provided with an effect control data holding area as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. The effect control data holding area includes an effect control flag setting unit, an effect control timer setting unit, an effect control counter setting unit, and an effect control buffer setting unit.

There are a plurality of types of effect control flag setting units that can update the state according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 and the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. A flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various effect operations such as the display operation of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the effect control timer setting unit stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The effect control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count values of the plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In addition, the data constituting the start winning command buffer at the time of winning is stored in the predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit. The command buffer received at the time of starting winning corresponds to the storage area (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages in the first special figure reserved storage. A storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number "1-0") corresponding to the first special figure during variable display is provided. Further, in the start winning command buffer, the storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages in the second special figure reserved storage is stored. (Area corresponding to) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”) corresponding to the second special figure during variable display are provided. When there is a start prize to the 1st start winning opening or the 2nd starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (1st starting opening winning designation command or the 2nd starting opening winning designation command) or the hold memory number notification command ( Commands such as the first hold storage number notification command or the second hold storage number notification command) are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the 1st special figure hold storage and the storage area corresponding to the 2nd special figure hold storage in the received command buffer at the time of starting winning associate these commands, and the 1st special figure hold storage and the 2nd special figure hold storage. Figure A storage area (entry) for storing separately from the hold storage is secured.

The stored contents of these storage areas (entries) will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the highest held storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. It is shifted up one by one so that it does.

The effect control CPU 120 stores the command at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure hold storage of the received command buffer at the time of starting winning. At the time of starting winning to the second starting winning opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the second special figure hold storage of the received command buffer at the time of starting winning. At the time of the start winning, the start opening prize designation command to the hold storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when the command is received, each command is stored in the storage area corresponding to each of the end "1" to "4" of the buffer number corresponding to the first special figure hold storage or the second special figure hold storage. I will go.

Next, the process executed by the CPU 103 in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8-15 is a flowchart showing the start winning determination process (S101) shown in FIG. In the start winning determination process, as shown in FIG. 8-15, the CPU 103 first receives a detection signal from the first start opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the first start port switch 22A is ON (208SGS501a). At this time, if the first start port switch 22A is on (208SGS501a; Y), the number of reserved special figures reserved for the special figure game using the first special figure is set to a predetermined upper limit value (the number of reserved stored figures of the first special figure). For example, it is determined whether or not the upper limit storage number is "4") (208SGS502). The CPU 103 may specify the first special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the first reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the first reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit. When the number of reserved storages in the first special figure is not the upper limit value (208SGS502; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit is set to "1" (208SGS503).

When the first start port switch 22A is off at 208SGS501a (208SGS501a; N), or when the first special figure hold storage number reaches the upper limit value at 208SGS502 (208SGS502; Y), the variable winning ball device 6B Based on the detection signal from the second start port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start winning opening formed by, it is determined whether or not the second start port switch 22B is on (208SGS501b). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is on (208SGS501b; Y), the second special figure reserved storage number, which is the reserved storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value (20SGS501b; Y). For example, it is determined whether or not the upper limit storage number is "4") (208SGS505). The CPU 103 may specify the second special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the second reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the second reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit. When the second special figure hold storage number is not the upper limit value in 208SGS505 (208SGS505; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit is set to "2" (208SGS506).

When the second start port switch is not on (208SGS501b; N) or when the second special figure reserved storage number is the upper limit value (208SGS505; Y), the start winning determination process ends.

After executing any of the processes of 208SGS503 and 208SGS506, the special figure hold storage number corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the stored value of the start port buffer, is updated to be added by 1 (208SGS507). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first hold storage count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second hold storage count value is added by 1. In this way, the first hold memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. Further, the second reserved memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of reserved storages is also updated to be added by 1 (208SGS508). For example, the total hold storage count value, which is the stored value of the total hold storage counter provided in the game control counter setting unit, may be updated so as to be added by 1.

After executing the process of 208SGS508, the CPU 103 uses the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is extracted (208SGS509). Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way is stored by being set as hold information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value (208SGS510). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the numerical data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the first 2 Numerical data indicating random values MR1 to MR3 are stored in the special figure hold storage unit.

The numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set as "big hit", and further, the variable display result. It is used to determine the type of big hit when it is called "big hit". The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol. By executing the process of 208SGS509, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used for determining the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol and the variable display mode including the variable display time.

Following the processing of the 208SGS510, the transmission setting of the start port winning designation command according to the start port buffer value is performed (208SGS 511). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer. The setting for transmitting the first start opening prize designation command to 12 is made. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, so that the effect control board 12 is subjected to. Make settings to send the second start port winning designation command. The start port winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Will be done.

Following the process of 208SGS511, the random value determination process at the time of winning is executed (208SGS512). After that, for example, the hold storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 by storing the storage address of the hold storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. (208SGS513). The hold storage number notification command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Will be done.

After executing the process of 208SGS513, it is determined whether or not the start port buffer value is "1" (208SGS514). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "1" (208SGS514; Y), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (208SGS515), and then the process proceeds to 208SGS501b. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2" (208SGS514; N), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (208SGS516), and then the start winning determination process is performed. To finish. As a result, even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid start prize for the game ball, the process based on the detection of both valid start prizes can be reliably completed.

FIG. 8-16 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed by the 208 SGS 512 of FIG. 8-15 as the winning random number value determination process. When the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started in the feature unit 208SG, the game state, the special symbol for executing the variable display, and the display according to the set value are displayed in the special symbol normal processing (step S22 in FIG. 5). Select the result judgment table (see FIGS. 8-7 to 8-10), and use the selected display result judgment table to set the special figure display result (variable display result of the special symbol) as a "big hit" and make a big hit game state. It is determined whether or not to control the game and whether or not to control the small hit game state by setting the special figure display result as a "small hit".

On the other hand, apart from these determinations, the CPU 103 executes the winning random number value determination processing of the 208SGS512 at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening). Therefore, it is determined whether or not it is determined that the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the special symbol display result, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the predetermined display mode accompanied by super reach. conduct. As a result, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit before the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the start winning opening is started, that is, at the start of the variable display. Before Then, as will be described later, the effect control CPU 120 or the like executes a look-ahead advance notice effect such as a hold display advance notice effect.

In the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. 8-16 (A), the CPU 103 first confirms the state of the time saving flag and the probability variation flag provided in, for example, the game control flag setting unit 208SG152, for pachinko gaming. The current gaming state of the machine 1 is specified (208SGS521). The CPU 103 identifies that it is in the probability change state (high probability high base state) when the probability change flag is on, and is in the time saving state (low probability high base state) when the probability change flag is off and the time reduction flag is on. When both the probability variation flag and the time saving flag are off, it is sufficient to specify that the normal state (low probability low base state).

Following the processing of the 208SGS521, the CPU 103 specifies a set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (208SGS522). Next, the display result determination table according to the current game state, the start opening buffer value, and the set value is selected and set (208SGS524).

Specifically, when the start port buffer value is "1", the set value is 1, and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the first special figure shown in FIG. 8-7 (A) is used. When the display result judgment table is set and the set value is 1 and the game state is the probability change state, the display result judgment table for the first special figure shown in FIG. 8-7 (B) is set and the set value is 2. When the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the display result determination table for the first special figure shown in FIG. 8-7 (C) is set, the set value is 2, and the game state is in the probable change state. If there is, the display result determination table for the first special figure shown in FIG. 8-7 (D) is set, and if the set value is 3 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, FIG. 8-7 (E). ) Is set, and when the set value is 3 and the gaming state is the probabilistic state, the display result judgment table for the first special figure shown in FIG. 8-7 (F) is set. To set.

Further, when the start port buffer value is "1", the set value is 4, and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the first special figure display result determination shown in FIG. 8-8 (A) is determined. When the table is set and the set value is 4 and the gaming state is the probabilistic state, the display result determination table for the first special figure shown in FIG. 8-8 (B) is set, and the set value is 5 and When the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the display result determination table for the first special figure shown in FIG. 8-8 (C) is set, and when the set value is 5 and the gaming state is the probabilistic state. When the display result determination table for the first special figure shown in FIG. 8-8 (D) is set and the set value is 6 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is shown in FIG. 8-8 (E). The display result determination table for the first special figure is set, and when the set value is 6 and the gaming state is the probabilistic state, the display result determination table for the first special figure shown in FIG. 8-8 (F) is set. ..

When the start port buffer value is "2", the set value is 1, and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the display result determination for the second special figure shown in FIG. 8-9 (A) is determined. When the table is set and the set value is 1 and the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, the display result determination table for the second special figure shown in FIG. 8-9 (B) is set, and the set value is 2 and When the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the display result determination table for the second special figure shown in FIG. 8-9 (C) is set, and when the set value is 2 and the gaming state is the probabilistic state. When the display result determination table for the second special figure shown in FIG. 8-9 (D) is set and the set value is 3 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is shown in FIG. 8-9 (E). The display result judgment table for the second special figure is set, and when the set value is 3 and the gaming state is the probabilistic state, the display result judgment table for the second special figure shown in FIG. 8-9 (F) is set. ..

Further, when the start port buffer value is "2", the set value is 4, and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the display result determination for the second special figure shown in FIG. 8-10 (A) is determined. When the table is set and the set value is 4 and the gaming state is the probabilistic state, the display result determination table for the second special figure shown in FIG. 8-10 (B) is set, and the set value is 5 and When the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the display result determination table for the second special figure shown in FIG. 8-10 (C) is set, and when the set value is 5 and the gaming state is the probabilistic state. When the display result determination table for the second special figure shown in FIG. 8-10 (D) is set and the set value is 6 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is shown in FIG. 8-10 (E). The display result judgment table for the second special figure is set, and when the set value is 6 and the gaming state is the probabilistic state, the display result judgment table for the second special figure shown in FIG. 8-10 (F) is set. ..

After setting the display result determination table, the variable display result determination module (208SGS525) performs a process of determining whether the special figure display result is "big hit", "small hit", or "missing". In the variable display result judgment module, the numerical range of the big hit judgment value or the small hit judgment value in the set variable display result judgment table is compared with the value of the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment, and the disorder is described. If the value of the numerical value MR1 is within the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, the variable display result is judged as a big hit, and if the value of the random value MR1 is within the numerical range of the small hit judgment value, the variable display result is judged as a small hit. Then, if the value of the random number value MR1 is outside the numerical range of the big hit determination value and outside the numerical range of the small hit determination value, the variable display result may be determined to be out of range.

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the 208SGS525 determines that the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS526). When it is determined that the hit is not a big hit (208SGS526; N), it is determined whether or not the variable display result is determined to be a small hit in the 208SGS525 (208SGS527). When it is determined that the small hit does not occur, that is, when it is determined that the variable display is out of alignment (208SGS527; N), the first symbol designation is a symbol designation command corresponding to the variable display result being "out of alignment". The command transmission setting is executed (208SGS527a), and it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is set, that is, whether or not the current gaming state is the time saving state (208SGS528).

When the time saving flag is not set (208SGS528; N), the deviation pattern determination table A shown in FIG. 8-14 is selected and set, and the process proceeds to 208SGS536 (208SGS529). When the time saving flag is set. (208SGS528; Y) selects and sets the deviation pattern determination table D shown in FIG. 8-14 (D), and proceeds to 208SGS536 (208SGS530).

When it is determined by the 208SGS526 that the variable display is a big hit (208SGS526; Y), the big hit type is determined based on the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type and the big hit type determination table (208SGS533). At this time, the CPU 103 responds to the fluctuation special figure (“first special figure” corresponding to “1” or “second special figure” corresponding to “2”) specified corresponding to the start port buffer value. , Select the jackpot type determination table data from the table data that composes the jackpot type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected jackpot type determination table data, it is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is determined.

Further, a symbol designation command according to the determined jackpot type, that is, a second symbol designation command in the case of jackpot A, a third symbol designation command in the case of jackpot B, and a fourth symbol designation command in the case of jackpot C. The transmission setting of the symbol designation command is executed (208SGS534), and then the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 8-13 (A) is selected and set as a table for determining the jackpot fluctuation pattern (208SGS535). ), Proceed to 208SGS536.

Further, when the 208SGS527 determines that a small hit is obtained in the variable display (208SGS527; Y), the transmission setting of the sixth symbol designation command, which is a symbol designation command corresponding to the variable display result being a "small hit". Is executed (208SGS531), the variation pattern determination table for small hits shown in FIG. 8-13 (B) is selected and set (208SGS532), and the process proceeds to 208SGS536.

In the feature unit 208SG, in the deviation pattern determination table A to the deviation variation pattern determination table D, determination values of 1 to 700 are commonly assigned to the non-reach variation pattern and the normal reach variation pattern. The fluctuation pattern of super reach is assigned to 701 to 997.

Therefore, when the variable display result is out of alignment, the variation pattern is determined using the deviation pattern determination table A or the deviation pattern determination table D, so that the determination of non-reach and super reach can be made. Even if the number of reserved memories changes later, it will always be a non-reach or super reach fluctuation pattern. Therefore, in the determination at the time of starting winning, the deviation pattern determination table A or the deviation pattern determination table D is used to determine the variation pattern. Is to be judged.

After executing any of the processes of 208SGS529, 208SGS530, 208SGS532,208SGS535, the variation pattern determination table set in each of these steps and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination are used to perform the disturbance. The variation category according to the range of determination values including the numerical value MR3 is determined (208SGS536). As shown in FIG. 8-16 (B), the feature unit 208SG has a variable display mode of "non-reach" in common regardless of the total number of reserved storages when at least the variable display result is "off". Variable category, variable display mode of "super reach", variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach and small hit), and "other" variable category. It suffices if it is possible to determine whether or not the variable category is determined based on the random number value MR3.

After that, after setting for transmitting the variable category designation command according to the determination result by the processing of 208SGS536 to the effect control board 12 (208SGS537), the random number value determination processing at the time of winning is terminated.

The symbol designation command and the variable category designation command are transmitted when the CPU 103 executes a command control process.

Next, the processing executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8-17 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (S171) shown in FIG. 7.

In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable display start command reception flag is set (208SGS271). When the first variable display start command reception flag is set (208SGS271; Y), it corresponds to the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure hold storage in the start winning command buffer. The various command data and various flags that are attached and stored are shifted upward by one buffer number (S272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

If the first variable display start command reception flag is not set in the 208SGS271 (208SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second variable display start command reception flag is set (208SGS273). If the second variable display start command reception flag is not set (208SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second variable display 2 start command reception flag is set (208SGS273; Y). ), Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure hold storage in the received command buffer at the time of starting winning are stored for one buffer number. It shifts to the upper side one by one (208SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

After executing the 208SGS272 or 208SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (208SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (208SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the display result specified by the display result specification command, and stores the data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. do.

In the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, when the received display result specification command is the second variable display result specification command corresponding to the jackpot A, for example, as a stop symbol, a decorative symbol in which three symbols are arranged in an even number is used. Determine the combination (big hit symbol). Further, when the received display result specification command is the third variable display result specification command corresponding to the jackpot B, for example, as a stop symbol, a decorative symbol in which 3 symbols are arranged in odd numbers other than "7" and "3" is used. Determine the combination (big hit symbol). Then, when the received display result specification command is the fourth variable display result specification command corresponding to the jackpot C, for example, a combination of decorative symbols in which three symbols are aligned with "7" or "3" as stop symbols (big hit). Design) is decided. When the received display result specification command is the fifth variable table uncle result specification command indicating a small hit, for example, three consecutive numbers such as "123" and "246", and three consecutive even numbers (or three consecutive even numbers). Determine the combination of decorative symbols (small hit symbol) such as (odd number). Then, when the received display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command indicating the loss, for example, a combination of decorative symbols (missing symbols) different from the above-mentioned big hit symbol and small hit symbol is determined.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, a random number for determining the stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and a numerical value are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

After the execution of the 208SGS276, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is a variation pattern of the super reach (208SG277). Whether or not the variable display variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern may be specified from the variation pattern specification command read out in 208SG275. When the variable display variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern (208SG277; Y), a cut for determining whether or not to execute the cut-in effect described later during the reach effect and the effect pattern of the cut-in effect. The in-effect determination process (208SGS278) is executed, and the process proceeds to 208SGS279. If the variable display variation pattern is not the super reach variation pattern (208SG277; N), the process proceeds to 208SGS279 without executing the process of 208SGS278.

Then, in the 208SGS279, the effect control CPU 120 executes a advance notice effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute the advance notice effect described later in the variable display and the effect pattern of the advance notice effect (208SGS279). As shown in FIGS. 8-27 to 8-29, the advance notice effect is an effect that can be executed during the variable display in the non-reach variation pattern, and the variable display starts in the normal reach and super reach variation patterns. It is a production that can be performed during the period from the time of reaching to the timing of reaching.

After executing 208SGS279, the effect control CPU 120 selects an effect control pattern (process table) according to the variation pattern designation command (208SGS280). Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (208SGS281).

In the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are controlled. The sound control execution data, the operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, and the like are arranged in order in chronological order in association with each process data n (1 to N). There is.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the effect device (image display as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as production parts, speakers 8L, 8R as production parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (208SGS282). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a command to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern. Further, in order to control the lighting / extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, the control signal (phone number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

In the feature unit 208SG in the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern designation command so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one. May select the variation pattern to be used from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the variation pattern specification command.

Then, a value corresponding to the fluctuation time (variable display time) specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is set in the fluctuation time timer (208SGS283). Further, a predetermined time is set in the fluctuation control timer (208SGS284). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms. Every time the predetermined time elapses, the effect control CPU 120 writes the image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols to the VRAM, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image according to the signal, whereby a variable display of the decorative pattern is realized. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (S172), and the variable display start setting process is terminated (208 SGS285).

8-18 to 8-20 are flowcharts showing the cut-in effect determination process shown in FIG. 8-17. In the cut-in effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variation pattern is a variation pattern of super reach α or super reach β (208SGS301). When the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern of super reach α or super reach β (208SGS301; Y), the cut-in effect determination process is terminated, and when the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern of super reach γ or super reach δ (208SGS301; Y). N) further determines whether or not the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern of super reach γ (208SGS302).

When the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ (208SGS301; Y), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern is PB1-5, that is, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ that executes the revival effect (208SGS303). .. When the fluctuation pattern is PB1-5 (208SGS303; Y), the effect control CPU 120 specifies the jackpot type (208SGS304) and determines whether or not the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS305). ..

When the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS305; Y), whether or not to execute the cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the jackpot type being jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS306), and 208SGS308. Proceed to. In 208SGS306, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (A), the cut-in effect is not executed based on the fluctuation pattern being PB1-5 and the variable display result (big hit type) being jackpot A or jackpot B. Is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 55%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 5%. , The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

As shown in FIGS. 8-28 and 8-31, the cut-in effect in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment displays the image of the push button 31B on the image display device 5 during the reach effect of the super reach γ. Then, the player is urged to operate the push button 31B. Then, when the push button 31B is operated during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B, or when the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B ends without the push button 31B being operated, each effect is displayed on the image display device 5. Display effects and cut-in images according to the pattern.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-23 and 8-31, if the effect pattern is pattern CI-1, the image display device 5 displays the cut-in image 208SG005w together with the blue effect, and the effect pattern is If the pattern CI-2, the cut-in image 208SG005x is displayed with the red effect on the image display device 5, and if the effect pattern is the pattern CI-3, the cut-in image 208SG005y is displayed with the golden effect on the image display device 5. If the effect pattern is pattern CI-4, the image display device 5 displays the cut-in image 208SG005z together with the rainbow-colored effect.

Further, when the jackpot type is jackpot C (208SGS305; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the cut-in effect and the effect pattern based on the jackpot type being jackpot C (208SGS307). Proceed to 208SGS308. In 208SGS307, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (A), the non-execution of the cut-in effect is 10% based on the fact that the fluctuation pattern is PB1-5 and the variable display result (big hit type) is big hit C. Determined by the ratio of. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 54%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 5%. The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 1%.

After executing 208SGS306 or 208SGS307, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the cut-in effect is determined (208SGS308). When the execution of the cut-in effect is decided (208SGS308; Y), the determined effect pattern is stored and a value corresponding to the period until the start of the cut-in effect is set in the cut-in effect start waiting timer (208SGS309, 208SGS310). ), The cut-in effect determination process is completed.

Further, in the case of the 208SGS303, when the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern (PA2-4 or PB1-4) of the super reach γ that does not execute the revival effect (208SGS303; N), the effect control CPU 120 is set to the pachinko gaming machine 1. The set value is specified (208 SGS311), and it is determined whether or not the specified set value is any of 1 to 3 (208SGS312). The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be specified based on the set value designation command received from the CPU 103.

When the execution of the cut-in effect is determined in the cut-in effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the cut-in effect start waiting timer by -1 each time the variable display effect process (S172) is executed. If the timer for waiting for the start of the cut-in effect has timed out, the process table for the cut-in effect is set according to the determined effect pattern. After that, each time the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect process during variable display, the effect device (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp) is in accordance with the contents of the data (process data) in the cut-in effect process table. The cut-in effect may be executed by controlling 9 etc.).

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3 (208SGS312; Y), it is further determined whether or not the variable display result is a big hit (308SGS313). Whether or not the variable display result is a big hit may be determined by determining whether or not the fluctuation pattern is PB1-4, which is a super reach γ big hit. When the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS313; Y), the big hit type is specified (208SGS314), and it is determined whether or not the big hit type is a big hit A or a big hit B (208SGS315).

When the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS3315; Y), the cut-in effect is executed based on the setting value being any one of 1 to 3 and the jackpot type being jackpot A or jackpot B. (208SGS3316) is determined, and the processes of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. In 208SGS316, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (B), the cut-in is based on the fact that the set value is any of 1 to 3 and the variable display result (big hit type) is big hit A or big hit B. The non-execution of the production is determined at a rate of 10%. Further, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 50%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

When the jackpot type is jackpot C (208SGS315; N), the effect control CPU 120 performs a cut-in effect based on the setting value being any one of 1 to 3 and the jackpot type being jackpot C. The presence / absence of execution and the effect pattern are determined (208SGS317), and the processes of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. In 208SGS317, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (B), the cut-in effect is not produced based on the fact that the set value is any of 1 to 3 and the variable display result (big hit type) is big hit C. The execution is determined at a rate of 10%. Further, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 45%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 5%.

When the variable display result is out of alignment in 208SGS313 (208SGS313; N), the effect control CPU 120 cuts in based on the fact that the set value is one of 1 to 3 and the variable display result is out of alignment. Whether or not to execute the effect and the effect pattern are determined (208SGS318), and the processes of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. In 208SGS318, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (B), the non-execution of the cut-in effect is 55% based on the fact that the set value is any of 1 to 3 and the variable display result is out of order. Determined by percentage. Further, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 35%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 0%. , The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

Further, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the 208SGS312 is any of 4 to 6 (208SGS312; N), the effect control CPU 120 has a set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of 4. It is determined whether or not (208SGS221). When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4 (208SGS321; Y), it is further determined whether or not the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS322). Whether or not the variable display result is a big hit may be determined by determining whether or not the fluctuation pattern is PB1-4, which is a super reach γ big hit.

When the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS322; Y), the big hit type is specified (208SGS323), and it is determined whether or not the big hit type is a big hit A or a big hit B (208SGS324).

When the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS324; Y), the presence / absence of execution of the cut-in effect and the effect pattern based on the setting value being 4 and the jackpot type being jackpot A or jackpot B. (208SGS325), and the processing of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 is executed. In 208SGS325, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (C), the non-execution of the cut-in effect is performed at a rate of 10% based on the setting value of 4 and the jackpot type being jackpot A or jackpot B. decide. Further, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 50%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

When the jackpot type is jackpot C (208SGS324; N), the presence / absence of execution of the cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the setting value of 4 and the jackpot type being jackpot C (the jack-in effect is executed). 208SGS326), 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. In 208SGS326, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (C), the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 10% based on the setting value of 4 and the jackpot type being jackpot C. Further, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 45%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 5%.

When the variable display result is out of alignment in 208SGS322 (208SGS322; N), it is further determined whether or not the gaming state is a high-accuracy high-base state (208SGS327). The game state may be specified from the game state designation command received from the CPU 103.

When the gaming state is the high-accuracy high-base state (208SGS327; Y), the cut is based on the fact that the set value is 4, the variable display result is out of alignment, and the gaming state is the high-accuracy high-base state. Whether or not to execute the in-effect and the effect pattern are determined (208SGS328), and the processes of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. In 208SGS328, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (C), the cut is based on the fact that the set value is 4, the variable display result is out of alignment, and the gaming state is the high accuracy and high base state. The non-execution of the in-effect is determined at a rate of 40%. Further, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 20%. , The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

When the gaming state is the low-accuracy high-based state or the low-accuracy low-base state (208SGS327; N), the set value is 4, the variable display result is out of alignment, and the gaming state is the low-accuracy high-based state. The presence / absence of execution of the cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the state or the low probability low base state (208 SGS 329), and the processes of 208 SGS 308 to 208 SGS 310 are executed. In 208SGS329, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (C), the set value is 4, the variable display result is out of alignment, and the gaming state is the low probability high base state or the low probability low base state. Based on this, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 59%. Further, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 1%. , The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

Further, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the 208SGS321 is not 4 (208SGS321; N), whether or not the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5 in the effect control CPU 120. Is determined (208 SGS330). When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5 (208SGS330; Y), it is further determined whether or not the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS331). Whether or not the variable display result is a big hit may be determined by determining whether or not the fluctuation pattern is PB1-4, which is a super reach γ big hit.

When the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS331; Y), the big hit type is specified (208SGS332), and it is determined whether or not the big hit type is a big hit A or a big hit B (208SGS333).

When the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS333; Y), the presence / absence of execution of the cut-in effect and the effect pattern based on the set value being 5 and the jackpot type being jackpot A or jackpot B. (208SGS334), and the processing of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 is executed. In 208SGS334, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (D), the non-execution of the cut-in effect is performed at a rate of 10% based on the setting value of 5 and the jackpot type being jackpot A or jackpot B. decide. Further, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 50%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

When the jackpot type is jackpot C (208SGS333; N), the presence / absence of execution of the cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the setting value of 5 and the jackpot type being jackpot C (the jack-in effect is executed). 208SGS335), 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. In 208SGS335, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (D), the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 10% based on the setting value of 5 and the jackpot type being jackpot C. Further, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 45%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 5%.

When the variable display result is out of alignment in the 208SGS331 (208SGS331; N), it is further determined whether or not the gaming state is a high-accuracy high-base state (208SGS336). The game state may be specified from the game state designation command received from the CPU 103.

When the gaming state is the high-accuracy high-base state (208SGS336; Y), the cut is based on the fact that the set value is 5, the variable display result is out of alignment, and the gaming state is the high-accuracy high-base state. Whether or not to execute the in-effect and the effect pattern are determined (208SGS337), and the processes of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. In 208SGS337, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (D), the cut is based on the fact that the set value is 5, the variable display result is out of alignment, and the gaming state is the high accuracy and high base state. The non-execution of the in-effect is determined at a rate of 35%. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 25%. , The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

When the gaming state is the low-accuracy high-based state or the low-accuracy low-base state (208SGS336; N), the set value is 5, the variable display result is out of alignment, and the gaming state is the low-accuracy high-based state. The presence / absence of execution of the cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the state or the low probability low base state (208 SGS 338), and the processes of 208 SGS 308 to 208 SGS 310 are executed. In 208SGS338, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (D), the set value is 5, the variable display result is out of alignment, and the gaming state is the low probability high base state or the low probability low base state. Based on this, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 58%. Further, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 2%. , The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

Further, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the 208SGS330 is not 5 (208SGS330; N), the effect control CPU 120 is variable, assuming that the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6. It is determined whether or not the display result is a big hit (208SGS339). Whether or not the variable display result is a big hit may be determined by determining whether or not the fluctuation pattern is PB1-4, which is a super reach γ big hit.

When the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS339; Y), the big hit type is specified (208SGS340), and it is determined whether or not the big hit type is a big hit A or a big hit B (208SGS341).

When the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS341; Y), the presence / absence of execution of the cut-in effect and the effect pattern based on the setting value of 6 and the jackpot type being jackpot A or jackpot B. (208SGS342), and the processing of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 is executed. In 208SGS342, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (E), the non-execution of the cut-in effect is performed at a rate of 10% based on the setting value of 6 and the jackpot type being jackpot A or jackpot B. decide. Further, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 50%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

When the jackpot type is jackpot C (208SGS341; N), the presence / absence of execution of the cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the setting value of 6 and the jackpot type being jackpot C (the jack-in effect is executed). 208SGS343), 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. In 208SGS343, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (E), the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 10% based on the setting value of 6 and the jackpot type of jackpot C. Further, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 45%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 5%.

When the variable display result is out of alignment in 208SGS339 (208SGS339; N), it is further determined whether or not the gaming state is a high-accuracy high-base state (208SGS344). The game state may be specified from the game state designation command received from the CPU 103.

When the gaming state is the high-accuracy high-base state (208SGS344; Y), the cut is based on the fact that the set value is 6, the variable display result is out of alignment, and the gaming state is the high-accuracy high-base state. Whether or not to execute the in-effect and the effect pattern are determined (208SGS345), and the processes of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. In 208SGS345, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (E), the cut is based on the fact that the set value is 6, the variable display result is out of alignment, and the gaming state is the high accuracy and high base state. The non-execution of the in-effect is determined at a rate of 30%. Further, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 is determined at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 is determined at a rate of 30%. , The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

When the gaming state is the low-accuracy high-based state or the low-accuracy low-base state (208SGS344; N), the set value is 6, the variable display result is out of alignment, and the gaming state is the low-accuracy high-based state. The presence / absence of execution of the cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the state or the low probability low base state (208 SGS 346), and the processes of 208 SGS 308 to 208 SGS 310 are executed. In 208SGS346, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (E), the set value is 6, the variable display result is out of alignment, and the gaming state is the low probability high base state or the low probability low base state. Based on this, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 57%. Further, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 3%. , The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

Further, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach δ (PS2-5 or PB1-6) in the 208SGS302 (202SGS302; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS351). .. Whether or not the variable display result is a big hit may be determined by determining whether or not the fluctuation pattern is PB1-4, which is a super reach γ big hit.

When the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS351; Y), the big hit type is specified (208SGS352), and it is determined whether or not the big hit type is a big hit A or a big hit B (208SGS353).

When the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS353; Y), whether or not to execute the cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the jackpot type being jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS354), and 208SGS308. ~ 208 The processing of SGS310 is executed. In 208SGS354, as shown in FIG. 8-22, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 10% based on the jackpot type being jackpot A or jackpot B. Further, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 50%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

When the jackpot type is jackpot C (208SGS353; N), whether or not to execute the cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the jackpot type being jackpot C (208SGS355), and the processes of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are determined. To execute. In 208SGS355, as shown in FIG. 8-22, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 10% based on the jackpot type being jackpot C. Further, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 45%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 5%.

When the variable display result is out of alignment in 208SGS351 (208SGS351; N), the presence / absence of execution of the cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the fact that the variable display result is out of alignment (208SGS356), and 208SGS308 to 208SGS310. Executes the processing of. In 208SGS356, as shown in FIG. 8-22, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 35% based on the fact that the variable display result is out of alignment. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 25%. , The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

As described above, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-21 and 8-22, when the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ or the super reach δ, the cut-in is performed. When the variable display result is the lowest (big hit expectation) when the effect is not executed and the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-1, the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-2. In this case, when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3, the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit increases in the order of the case where the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-4. (Expectation of big hit in cut-in effect: non-execution <pattern CI-1 <pattern CI-2 <pattern CI-3 <pattern CI-4).

In particular, when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-4, it is determined that the variable display result is a big hit and the big hit type is a big hit C regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-21, 8-22, and 8-24, when the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ or the super reach δ, the cut-in effect is performed by the pattern CI-3. Regarding the execution rate, the lowest setting (0%) is made when the set value is any of 1 to 3 and the fluctuation pattern is out of super reach γ and out of super reach δ. Then, when the fluctuation pattern is a super reach γ jackpot that executes the revival effect, the set value is one of 1 to 3 and the fluctuation pattern does not execute the revival effect. Is 4, and the fluctuation pattern is a super reach γ jackpot that does not execute the resurrection effect, the set value is 5, and the fluctuation pattern is a super reach γ jackpot that does not execute the resurrection effect, the setting value is 6 and the fluctuation pattern. Is set so that the ratio of executing the cut-in effect in the pattern CI-3 increases in the order of the case where is a super reach γ jackpot that does not execute the revival effect.

Further, paying attention when the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern (PA2-4 and PB1-4) of the super reach γ that does not execute the revival effect, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1-3, While it is confirmed that the variable display result is a big hit (any of big hit A to big hit C) when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 When is 4 to 6, the variable display result may be out of alignment even when the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3. That is, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, the cut-in is higher than when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3. The jackpot expectation when the effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 is set low. Therefore, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, when the reach effect of the super reach γ is executed and the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 and the variable display result is out of order, the pachinko gaming machine 1 It is confirmed that the set value set in is one of 4 to 6.

On the other hand, paying attention to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot (PB1-5) that executes the revival effect, the cut-in effect is the pattern CI-3 rather than the fluctuation pattern (PB1-4) of the super reach γ jackpot that executes the revival effect. And the rate of execution in pattern CI-4 is set low. For this reason, in the case where the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot that does not execute the revival effect, the cut-in effect is executed by CI-3 and the deviation is notified, so that the pachinko gaming machine Even though the player recognizes that the set value set to 1 is one of 4 to 6, the revival effect is executed later and it is notified that it is a big hit, so that the pachinko machine It is suppressed that the player is discouraged because it is uncertain whether or not the set value set in the gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6.

Further, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, and the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern of super reach γ (PA2-4 and PB1-4) that does not execute the revival effect. Attention is paid to the case where the variable display result is a big hit, the ratio of the cut-in effect being executed in the pattern CI-3 is set to be the same in all the set values, but the variable display result is out of order. The higher the set value, the higher the rate at which the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 (the pattern CI-3 execution rate at the time of deviation when the set values 4 to 6 are set: the set value 4 < Set value 5 <Set value 6).

Therefore, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, the higher the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3, and the variable display result is out of order. Since the frequency of the game becomes higher, the player can be expected that the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, and the game interest can be improved. There is.

Further, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6 and the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern of super reach γ (PA2-4 and PB1-4) that does not execute the revival effect. If the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are the same and the variable display result is different, the gaming state is low accuracy and high base state or low accuracy in the place where the gaming state is high accuracy and high base state. The cut-in effect is set to be executed in the pattern CI-3 at a higher rate than in the low base state.

Therefore, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 in the variable display in the high accuracy and high base state, and the variable display result is out of order, so that the gaming state is low accuracy. Even after shifting to the low base state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to any of 4 to 6 to encourage the player to continue the game, so that the gaming interest can be improved. ing.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-21 (B) to 8-21 (E), paying attention to the case where the variable display result is out of alignment, the higher the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the higher the cut-in. The execution rate of the production is set high. That is, in this feature unit 208SG, it is suggested that the ratio itself at which the cut-in effect is executed when the variable display result is out of alignment is set to any of the set values of 4 to 6 in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, in addition to whether or not the cut-in effect is executed in the effect pattern with high expectation of big hits, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the cut-in effect is executed. It is possible to improve the game entertainment.

Further, the determination ratio of the effect pattern of the cut-in effect shown in FIGS. 8-21 and 8-22 is only an example, and the determination ratio of the effect pattern of the cut-in effect is determined according to the gaming machine to which the present invention is applied. It may be different from the feature unit 208SG as appropriate. However, when the determination ratios of the effect patterns of these cut-in effects are appropriately different, the tendency of the jackpot expectation of each effect pattern (big hit expectation in the cut-in effect: non-execution <pattern CI-1 <pattern CI-2). By maintaining the <Pattern CI-3 <Pattern CI-4) itself, the player does not misunderstand the jackpot expectation according to the production pattern of the cut-in effect when executing the cut-in effect. Is desirable.

Further, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-21 and 8-22, when the variable display is executed by the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ and the super reach δ, the pachinko gaming machine 1 Although the embodiment in which the cut-in effect is executed during the variable display is different depending on the set value and the variable display result set in, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. When the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern of the reach γ or the super reach δ, the cut-in effect may be always executed during the variable display. In the case where the cut-in effect is always executed during the variable display of the super reach γ and the super reach δ, if the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, When the variable display result is out of alignment, the ratio assigned to non-execution of the cut-in effect (see FIGS. 8-21 (C) to 8-21 (E)) is the pattern CI-1 with a low jackpot expectation or By assigning to both the pattern CI-1 and the pattern CI-2, the ratio of the cut-in effect executed in the pattern CI-3 may be maintained so as not to be different from the feature unit 208SG. By doing so, the cut-in effect is excessively executed in the pattern CI-3 while improving the interest by executing the cut-in effect during the variable display of the super reach γ and the super reach δ. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from easily recognizing that the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6.

FIG. 8-25 is a flowchart showing the advance notice effect determination process in FIG. 8-17. In the advance notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (208SGS361). Then, it is determined whether or not the variable display result is a small hit (208SGS362). When the variable display result is a small hit (208SGS362; Y), the advance notice effect determination process is terminated, and when the variable display result is a big hit or a miss (208SGS362; N), the execution of the cut-in effect is further determined. Whether or not, that is, whether or not any effect pattern of the cut-in effect is stored is determined (208 SGS363).

When the execution of the cut-in effect is determined (208SGS363; Y), it is further determined whether or not the stored cut-in effect effect pattern is pattern CI-3 or pattern CI-4 (208SGS364). ). When the stored effect pattern of the cut-in effect is pattern CI-3 or pattern CI-4 (208SGS364; Y), the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 or the pattern CI-4. , Whether or not the advance notice effect is executed and the effect pattern are determined based on the specified variable display result and the variation pattern (208SGS365).

On the other hand, when it is determined not to execute the cut-in effect (208SGS363; N) or when the stored effect pattern is the pattern CI-1 or CI-2 (208SGS364; N), the variable display result is It is determined whether or not it is a big hit (208SGS366). When the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS366; Y), the big hit type is specified (208SGS367), and whether or not the advance notice effect is executed and the effect pattern are determined based on the specified big hit type (208SGS368).

When the variable display result is out of alignment (208SGS366; N), the presence / absence of execution of the advance notice effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the specified variable display result and the variation pattern (208SGS369).

Specifically, in the processing of 208SGS365, as shown in FIG. 8-26 (A), when the variable display result is a big hit, the non-execution of the advance notice effect is determined at a rate of 15%. Further, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern YE-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern YE-2 is determined at a rate of 55%, and pattern YE-3 is determined at a rate of 0%. The pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%. Further, when the variable display result is out of alignment and the fluctuation pattern is super reach (out of super reach), the non-execution of the advance notice effect is determined at a rate of 50%. Further, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern YE-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern YE-2 is determined at a rate of 20%, and pattern YE-3 is determined at a rate of 0%. The pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

Further, when the variable display result is out of alignment and the fluctuation pattern is normal reach (out of normal reach), the non-execution of the advance notice effect is determined at a rate of 80%. Further, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern YE-1 at a rate of 15%, pattern YE-2 is determined at a rate of 5%, and pattern YE-3 is determined at a rate of 0%. The pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%. If the variable display result is out of reach and the variation pattern is non-reach (non-reach out of reach), the non-execution of the advance notice effect is determined at a rate of 95%. Further, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern YE-1 at a rate of 5%, pattern YE-2 is determined at a rate of 0%, and pattern YE-3 is determined at a rate of 0%. The pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

As described above, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, the case where the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 and the variable display result is out of order is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. This is a case where the set value is any of 4 to 6 and the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern of the deviation of super reach γ (PA2-4).

As shown in FIGS. 8-26 (C) and 8-30, the pattern YE-1 is an effect pattern for displaying the image 208SG005s of the character A together with the blue effect on the image display device 5, and the pattern YE-2 is an effect pattern. The image display device 5 is an effect pattern for displaying the image 208SG005t of the character B together with the red effect, and the pattern YE-3 is an effect pattern for displaying the image 208SG005u of the character C with the golden effect on the image display device 5. , Pattern YE-4 is an effect pattern for displaying a group image 208SG005v of characters A to C together with a rainbow-colored effect on the image display device 5.

Further, in the processing of 208SGS368, as shown in FIG. 8-26 (B), when the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B, the non-execution of the advance notice effect is determined at a rate of 10%. Further, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern YE-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern YE-2 is determined at a rate of 45%, and pattern YE-3 is determined at a rate of 15%. The pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%. If the jackpot type is jackpot C, the non-execution of the advance notice effect is determined at a rate of 10%. Further, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern YE-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern YE-2 is determined at a rate of 40%, and pattern YE-3 is determined at a rate of 15%. The pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 5%.

Further, in the processing of 208SGS369, as shown in FIG. 8-26 (B), when the variable display result is out of alignment and the fluctuation pattern is super reach (out of super reach), 50% of the non-execution of the advance notice effect is performed. Determined by percentage. Further, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern YE-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern YE-2 is determined at a rate of 15%, and pattern YE-3 is determined at a rate of 5%. The pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%. again,
Further, when the variable display result is out of alignment and the variation pattern is normal reach (out of normal reach), the non-execution of the advance notice effect is determined at a rate of 80%. Further, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern YE-1 at a rate of 15%, pattern YE-2 is determined at a rate of 5%, and pattern YE-3 is determined at a rate of 0%. The pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%. If the variable display result is out of reach and the variation pattern is non-reach (non-reach out of reach), the non-execution of the advance notice effect is determined at a rate of 95%. Further, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern YE-1 at a rate of 5%, pattern YE-2 is determined at a rate of 0%, and pattern YE-3 is determined at a rate of 0%. The pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

As described above, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, the ratio (big hit expectation degree) at which the variable display result becomes the big hit is set to be the lowest when the notice effect is not executed during the variable display, and the notice effect is a pattern. Variable display in the order of execution in YE-1, the advance notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-2, the advance notice effect is executed in YE-3, and the advance notice effect is executed in YE-4. The rate at which the result is a big hit is set to be high (expectation of big hit of the notice effect: non-execution of the advance notice effect <execution in pattern YE-1 <execution in pattern YE-2 <execution in pattern YE-3 <pattern Executed with YE-4).

In particular, as shown in FIG. 8-26 (B), when the non-execution of the cut-in effect is decided or the cut-in effect is lower than the pattern CI-3 or the pattern CI-4, the pattern CI- When the execution in 1 or the pattern CI-2 is decided, the advance notice effect may be executed in the pattern YE-4 only when the jackpot type is the jackpot C. Therefore, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, in addition to whether or not the advance notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-3, the game also determines whether or not the advance notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-4. It is possible to draw people's attention.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-26 (A), as the effect pattern of the cut-in effect, the pattern CI-3, which has a higher expectation of a big hit than the pattern CI-1 and the pattern CI-2, or the variable display result is a big hit. When the pattern CI-4 that confirms that the jackpot type is jackpot C is determined, YE-3 or YE-4 is used as the effect pattern of the advance notice effect regardless of the variable display result or the fluctuation pattern. It is set so that it will not be executed. Therefore, when the variable display result is a big hit, the cut-in effect can be executed only by the pattern YE-1 and the pattern YE-2, so that the variable display result becomes a big hit, which is the start of the cut-in effect. It is prevented that the player recognizes the timing before the timing (the start timing of the advance notice effect). Furthermore, when the variable display result is out of alignment, neither the advance notice effect nor the cut-in effect is executed in an effect pattern with a high expectation of a big hit, so that the player is excessively opposed to the variable display result being a big hit. It is prevented from expecting.

After executing any of the processes of 208SGS365, 208SGS368, and 208SGS369, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the advance notice effect is determined (208SGS370). When the execution of the advance notice effect is decided (208SGS370; Y), the effect pattern determined by any of the processes of 208SGS365, 208SGS368, and 208SGS369 is stored (208SGS371), and the advance notice effect start waiting timer is set to give a notice. The production determination process is completed (208SGS372). When it is determined not to execute the advance notice effect (208SGS370; N), the advance notice effect determination process is terminated without executing the processes of 208SGS371 and 208SGS372.

When the execution of the advance notice effect is determined in the advance notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the advance notice effect start waiting timer by -1 each time the variable display effect process (S172) is executed, and the advance notice is given. When the effect waiting timer expires, the advance notice effect process table according to the determined effect pattern is set. After that, each time the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect processing during variable display, the effect device (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp 9) is in accordance with the contents of the data (process data) in the advance notice effect process table. Etc.), and the advance notice effect may be executed.

As described above, by making it possible to determine the execution of the cut-in effect and the advance notice effect within the variable display start setting process, as shown in FIGS. 8-27 (A) to 8-27 (C), non-reach In the out-of-range fluctuation pattern, the advance notice effect can be executed only in the pattern YE-1 during the variable display, and in the normal reach out-of-reach variation pattern, the advance notice effect is performed in the period before the reach during the variable display in the pattern YE-. It is possible to execute with 1 and pattern YE-2, and in the fluctuation pattern of super reach α off and super reach β off, the advance notice effect is given in the period before reach during the variable display, pattern YE-1 to pattern YE-. It can be executed in 3. It should be noted that the cut-in effect cannot be executed in the period after the reach in the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach deviation, the super reach α deviation, and the super reach γ deviation.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-28, in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ deviation and the super reach δ deviation, the advance notice effect can be executed by the patterns YE-1 to YE-3 in the period before the reach. In the period after the reach, the cut-in effect can be executed by the pattern CI-1 to the pattern CI-3. However, when the cut-in effect is determined to be executed in the pattern CI-3, the advance notice effect can be executed only in the pattern YE-1 and the pattern YE-2.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-29 (A) and 8-29 (B), in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot that does not execute the revival effect, the advance notice effect is performed in the period before the reach YE-1 to 1. It can be executed by the pattern YE-4, and the cut-in effect can be executed by the patterns CI-1 to the pattern CI-4 in the period after the reach. However, when the cut-in effect is determined to be executed in the pattern CI-3 or the pattern CI-4, the advance notice effect can be executed only in the pattern YE-1 and the pattern YE-2.

Next, the display mode of the image display device 5 at the time of executing the variable display in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-30 to 8-32. First, as shown in FIGS. 8-30 (A) to 8-30 (E), when the execution of the advance notice effect is determined at the start of the variable display, the advance notice effect is pattern YE- in the image display device 5. It is executed in any of 1 to pattern YE-4. Specifically, when the advance notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-1, the image 208SG005s of the character A is displayed together with the blue effect on the image display device 5, and the advance notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-2. When the image 208SG005t of the character B is displayed with the red effect on the image display device 5 and the advance notice effect is executed by the pattern YE-3, the image 208SG005u of the character C is displayed with the golden effect on the image display device 5. When the advance notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-4, the collective image 208SG005v of the characters A to C is displayed together with the rainbow-colored effect on the image display device 5.

At this time, the player expects a big hit depending on which character's image 208SG005s, 208SG005t, 208SG005u, 208SG005v the image displayed on the image display device 5 is, and the color of the effect displayed together with the image of these characters. It is possible to recognize the degree.

As described above, when the cut-in effect is determined to be executed by the pattern CI-3 or the pattern CI-4 at the start of the variable display, the advance notice effect is executed only by the pattern YE-1 or the pattern YE-2. It is possible.

When the variable display is a variable display of the super reach γ, the decorative symbols are displayed in a combination of reach as shown in FIGS. 8-31 (A) to 8-31 (C), and then the super reach is displayed. A reach effect of γ (a battle effect in which a ally character and an enemy character fight in this feature unit 208SG) is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-31 (D), when the cut-in effect execution start timing during the reach effect of the super reach γ is reached, the image display device 5 starts displaying the image of the push button 31B, and the player A promotion notification is performed to urge the user to operate the push button 31B. At this time, the player operates the push button 31B during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B, or the player operates the push button 31B without operating the push button 31B during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B. When the reception period elapses, the effect is displayed on the image display device 5 together with the cut-in image corresponding to the effect pattern of the cut-in effect.

Specifically, when the effect pattern of the cut-in effect is pattern CI-1
When the cut-in image 208SG005w is displayed with the blue effect on the image display device 5 and the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-2, the cut-in image 208SG005x is displayed with the red effect on the image display device 5 and cut. When the in-effect is executed by the pattern CI-3, the cut-in image 208SG005y is displayed together with the golden effect on the image display device 5, and when the advance notice effect is executed by the pattern YE-4, the image display device 5 displays the cut-in image 208SG005y. The cut-in image 208SG005z is displayed with a rainbow effect.

At this time, the player decides which of the cut-in images 208SG005w, 208SG005x, 208SG005y, and 208SG005z is the cut-in image displayed on the image display device 5, and the color of the effect displayed together with these cut-in images. It is possible to recognize the degree of expectation of a big hit.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 8-32 (A) and 8-32 (B), when the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is PS2-4 (variation pattern of the super reach γ out of line), the super reach γ As a reach effect result (battle effect result), when the ally character loses to the enemy character, it is notified that the variable display result is out of order, and the variable display ends. Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-32 (A) and 8-32 (C), when the variation pattern of the variable display is PB1-4 (fluctuation pattern of super reach γ jackpot that does not execute the revival effect). , As the reach effect result (battle effect result) of the super reach γ, when the ally character wins the enemy character, it is notified that the variable display result is a big hit, and the variable display ends.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-32 (A) and 8-32 (D) to 8-32 (F), the variation pattern of the variable display is PB1-5 (super reach γ jackpot that executes the revival effect). In the case of (variation pattern), it is notified that the variable display result is once out of order due to the defeat of the ally character by the enemy character as the reach effect result (battle effect result) of the super reach γ. Then, when the revival effect is executed, it is notified again that the variable display result is a big hit when the ally character reverses to the enemy character and wins as the reach effect result (battle effect result) of the super reach γ. The variable display ends.

Although not shown in particular, when the variable display is a variable display of super reach δ, after the decorative pattern is displayed in a combination of reach, the ally character and the enemy character are displayed in the same manner as the reach effect of super reach γ. Battle production) is executed. Then, when the cut-in effect is executed during the battle effect, the variable display result is always a big hit by executing the cut-in effect in the pattern CI-3. The battle production as the reach production of Super Reach δ may be the same as the battle production as the reach production of Super Reach γ, but the characters to be played against and the development of the battle are partially different. You may.

As described above, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-21, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the cut-in effect is the pattern CI. While it is confirmed that the variable display result will be a big hit by executing in -3, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, the cut-in effect is produced. There is a case where the variable display result is out of order when the pattern CI-3 is executed. That is, when the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 and the variable display result is out of order, it is determined that the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6. , When the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3, the player can pay attention to whether the variable display result is a big hit or a miss, and the game interest can be improved. There is.

In addition, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-21, after notifying that the variable display result is out of order as a variable pattern in which the cut-in effect can be executed during the reach effect. Super reach γ jackpot fluctuation pattern (super reach γ jackpot fluctuation pattern that executes resurrection effect, PB1-5) and super reach that does not execute resurrection effect A fluctuation pattern of γ jackpot (PB1-4) is provided, and when variable display is executed with the fluctuation pattern of super reach γ jackpot that executes the revival effect, the fluctuation of super reach γ jackpot that does not execute the revival effect. The ratio of executing the cut-in effect in the pattern CI-3 is set lower than that in the case of executing the variable display in the pattern. Therefore, when the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 during the reach effect of the super reach γ and it is notified that the variable display is out of order, the player sets the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Even if it recognizes that is any of 4 to 6, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4 to 6 by notifying that the revival effect is executed and the variable display is a big hit. It is possible to reduce the deterioration of the game interest due to an error in recognizing that it is one of the above.

In the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, the disadvantage setting values are set to 1 to 3 and the advantageous setting values are set to 4 to 6 as the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the setting values are set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The determination ratio of the effect pattern of the cut-in effect or the advance notice effect is different depending on whether the set value is the disadvantageous set value or the advantageous set value, but the present invention is not limited to this. As long as the disadvantage setting value includes 1 and the advantage setting value includes 6, they may be set in any range in which the values do not overlap with each other. Specifically, the disadvantage setting value may be 1 to 5 and the advantage setting value may be only 6, or the disadvantage setting value may be only 1 and the advantage setting value may be 2 to 6.

Further, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, an embodiment in which the suggestion effect in the present invention is described as a reach effect is illustrated, but the invention is not limited to this, and the suggestion effect in the present invention is being variably displayed. As long as it is an effect that can be executed, for example, an effect other than the reach effect may be used, such as a pseudo continuous effect in which a temporary stop of a decorative pattern and a revariable display are repeatedly executed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-21 (C) to 8-21 (E), the fluctuation of the super reach γ deviation when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6. When the variable display is executed in the pattern, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, the ratio of the cut-in effect being executed in the pattern CI-3 is the highest, and the pachinko game When the set value set in the machine 1 is 4, the ratio of the cut-in effect being executed in the pattern CI-3 is set to be the lowest. Therefore, the higher the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the higher the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 and the variable display result is out of order, and the higher the set value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Since the player can be expected to be set, the game interest can be improved.

In the feature unit 208SG of the embodiment, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, the variable display is executed with the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ out of line. Illustrates a mode in which the higher the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the higher the rate at which the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3. It is not limited, and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, and the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ out of line, the pachinko game Regardless of the set value set in the machine 1, the ratio at which the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 may be the same ratio. By doing so, when the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 in the variable display of the deviation of the super reach γ, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to be identified.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-6, which reach effect is to be executed and whether to execute the resurrection effect is determined in advance in association with each variation pattern, and is also determined in FIG. 8-13. As shown in (A), when the variable display result is a big hit, the CPU 103 determines the fluctuation pattern using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table of 1 regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, when the variable display result is a big hit, the ratio of executing the revival effect during the variable display is the same regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For this reason, the execution rate of the resurrection effect during the variable display follows the set value that determines the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit, so the player should pay attention to whether or not the resurrection effect is executed during the variable display. Can be done, and the game entertainment can be improved.

In the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, whether or not to execute the reach effect and whether or not to execute the revival effect is illustrated by exemplifying a form that is determined in advance in association with each variation pattern. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and whether or not to execute the reach effect and whether or not to execute the revival effect is changed by the effect control CPU 120 after the CPU 103 determines the variation pattern. It may be appropriately determined from the display result and the like.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-6 and 8-22, as the fluctuation pattern in the feature portion 208SG of the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern for executing the reach effect of the super reach δ (PA2-5 and PB1-6). Is provided, and when the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 during the reach effect of the super reach δ, the variable display result is always a big hit, so that the variation of the super reach effect increases and the super Since the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 during the reach effect of the reach δ and the player can pay attention to whether or not the variable display result becomes a big hit, the game interest can be improved.

In addition, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, the embodiment in which the variation pattern (PA2-5 and PB1-6) for executing the reach effect of the super reach δ is provided has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited thereto. Therefore, it is possible not to provide a variation pattern for executing the reach effect of the super reach δ.

Further, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, as the effects that can be executed during the variable display, a notice effect that can be executed during the period from the start of the variable display to the reach (or until the end timing of the variable display) and the reach. There is a cut-in effect that can be executed during the effect. Further, the advance notice effect can be executed by any of a plurality of effect patterns (patterns YE-1 to pattern YE-4) having different jackpot expectations. Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-26, when the variable display result is a big hit and the cut-in effect is determined to be executed in the pattern CI-3 or the pattern CI-4, which is an effect pattern with a high expectation of a big hit. Determines the effect pattern from the effect patterns (pattern YE-1 and pattern YE-2) excluding the pattern YE-3 and the pattern YE-4, which are highly expected to hit the jackpot, when executing the advance notice effect. It is possible to prevent the player from recognizing in advance that the variable display result will be a big hit by being executed by YE-3 or YE-4. Therefore, if it is decided to execute the cut-in effect in the pattern CI-4, whether or not the variable display result becomes a big hit by executing the advance notice effect in the pattern YE-1 or the pattern YE-2. It is possible to pay attention until the variable display of the crab is completed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-27 and 8-28, during the variable display of 1, the advance notice effect is set before the cut-in effect (from the start of the variable display). By making it executable during the period until reach), if the variable display result becomes a big hit, the player recognizes that the variable display result becomes a big hit from the timing before the cut-in effect is executed. This can be prevented and the deterioration of the game interest can be prevented.

In addition, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, the embodiment in which the advance notice effect can be executed at the timing prior to the cut-in effect during the variable display of 1 is illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the advance notice effect may be executed as a look-ahead effect during the variable display that is executed before the variable display that executes the cut-in effect. Further, the advance notice effect is executed during the period from the start of the cut-in effect to the end of the reach effect, so that the variable display result is obtained in the period from the start of the cut-in effect to the end of the reach effect. It may be possible to prevent the player from recognizing that the game is a big hit, and to prevent the game from being enjoyed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-21 and 8-22, when the variable display result is a big hit, the big hit type is always big hit C when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-4. On the other hand, when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3, the jackpot type can be any of the jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C, so the cut-in effect is changed to the pattern CI-4 during the variable display. It is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not it is executed. Further, when the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3, there is a possibility that the big hit type is the big hit A or the big hit B. Therefore, the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 and the variable display result. In the case of a miss, the player can be made to think that even if it is a big hit, it may have been a big hit A or a big hit B. Can be reduced.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-26, any of 4 to 6 is set as a set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (that is, the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 and the variable display result is obtained. When the cut-in effect is decided to be executed in the pattern CI-3, which is an effect pattern with a high expectation of a big hit, when the advance notice effect is executed, the expectation of a big hit is high. Since the effect pattern is determined from the effect patterns (pattern YE-1 and pattern YE-2) excluding the pattern YE-3 and the pattern YE-4, the advance notice effect is executed by the patterns YE-3 and YE-4. It is possible to prevent the player from recognizing in advance that the variable display result will be a big hit. Therefore, even though the variable display result does not become a big hit, the player against the fact that the variable display result becomes a big hit when the pattern CI-3 and the patterns YE-3 and YE-4 are executed during the same variable display. It is possible to prevent the expectation of the above from being excessively raised.

In the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, any one of 4 to 6 is set as a set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the cut-in effect is the pattern CI-3, which is an effect pattern with a high expectation of a big hit. The execution ratio of the pattern YE-3 and the pattern YE-4 is set to 0% as a form of restricting the execution of the notice effect in the pattern YE-3 and the pattern YE-4 when the execution of the pattern YE-3 and the pattern YE-4 is restricted (notice effect). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any of 4 to 6 can be set as a set value for the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the cut-in effect is set and the execution is decided in the pattern CI-3, which is an effect pattern with a high expectation of a big hit, the advance notice effect is given at a lower rate than the pattern YE-1 and the pattern YE-2. It may be possible to execute with the pattern YE-3 or the pattern YE-4. That is, in the present claim, "when the advantageous setting value is set and it is not determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state, the suggestion effect is performed in an embodiment including the specific effect. When it is executed, the execution of the second predetermined effect is restricted. ”In order to prevent the advance notice effect from being executed by the pattern YE-3 or the pattern YE-4, the advance notice effect is performed by the pattern YE-1 or the pattern. A form in which the pattern YE-3 or the pattern YE-4 is executed at a lower rate than the case where the YE-2 is executed is also included.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-21, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, and the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern (PA2-4) out of the super reach γ. In this case, if the set values are the same, the rate at which the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 in the high-accuracy high-base state is the same, and the cut-in effect is performed in the low-accuracy low-base state or the low-accuracy high-base state. It is set higher than the rate executed in pattern CI-3. Therefore, when the gaming state is the high-accuracy high-base state, the cut-in effect is produced in the variable display of the super reach γ out of line compared to the case where the gaming state is the low-accuracy low-base state or the low-accuracy high-base state. Since the ratio of execution in the pattern CI-3 is high, it becomes easy for the player to recognize that the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6 in the high accuracy and high base state. After the player recognizes that the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6 by executing the cut-in effect in the pattern CI-3 in the high accuracy and high base state. Is able to improve the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 because it is easy for the player to continue the game even after the gaming state shifts to the low probability and low base state.

In the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, and the variable display is displayed by the fluctuation pattern (PA2-4) of the super reach γ deviation. When executed, when the gaming state is the high-accuracy high-base state, if the set values are the same, the cut-in rate is higher than when the gaming state is the low-accuracy low-base state or the low-accuracy high-base state. Although the embodiment in which the effect can be performed by the pattern CI-3 is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6. Moreover, when the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern (PA2-4) out of the super reach γ, the cut-in effect can be executed in the pattern CI-3 when the gaming state is the high accuracy and high base state. When the gaming state is a low-accuracy low-base state or a low-accuracy high-base state, the cut-in effect may be disabled by the pattern CI-3.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these, and any changes or additions within the scope of the gist of the present invention are included in the present invention. ..

For example, in the feature unit 208SG of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-21, when the variable display is executed in the variation pattern (PB1-5) for executing the resurrection effect, the variation pattern in which the resurrection effect is not executed is executed. Although the embodiment in which the cut-in effect can be executed by the pattern CI-3 at a lower rate than the case where the variable display is executed by (PA2-4 or PB1-4) is illustrated, the present invention is limited to this. Instead, as a modified example 208SG-1, as shown in FIGS. 8-33 (A) to 8-33 (E), when variable display is executed in a variable pattern (PB1-5) for executing a resurrection effect. May make the cut-in effect infeasible with pattern CI-3. By doing so, when the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 and it is notified that the variable display result is out of order, any of 4 to 6 is set as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Even though the player recognizes that it is set, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the execution of the revival effect and the notification that the variable display result is a big hit.

Further, in the feature unit 208SG of the above-described embodiment, when the variable display is executed by the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot that executes the resurrection effect, the variable display is performed by the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot that does not execute the resurrection effect. Although the embodiment in which the ratio of executing the cut-in effect in the pattern CI-3 is set to be lower than that in the case of executing the above is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and FIG. As shown in −34 (A) to 8-34 (D), when the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot that executes the revival effect, the super reach γ jackpot that does not execute the revival effect The ratio of executing the cut-in effect in the pattern CI-3 may be set higher than in the case of executing the variable display in the variable pattern. By doing so, for example, the player places more importance on whether or not the variable display result is a big hit than whether or not the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6. In the case of, after the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 and it is notified that the variable display result is out of order, the revival effect is further executed and the variable display result is a big hit. Since it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not it is notified, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the feature unit 208SG of the above-described embodiment, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot (PB1-5) that executes the revival effect regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any one of 1 to 6. ), The cut-in effect can be executed by the pattern CI-3. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is shown as a modified example 208SG-3. As shown in 8-35 (A) to 8-35 (C), when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, the super reach γ jackpot that executes the revival effect is executed. When the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern (PB1-5) of, the cut-in effect can be executed in the pattern CI-3, while the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are 1-3. In either case, the cut-in effect may be disabled in the pattern CI-3 when the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern (PB1-5) of the super reach γ jackpot that executes the revival effect. By doing so, when the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern (PB1-5) of the super reach γ jackpot that executes the revival effect, the variable display result becomes a jackpot and the pachinko game machine 1 is set. It is confirmed that the set value is one of 4 to 6, and the revival effect is executed after it is once notified that the variable display result will be out of order during the reach effect of the super reach γ during the variable display. It is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the variable display result is notified to be a big hit, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

That is, in the feature unit 208SG, when the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 during the reach effect of the super reach γ, the setting is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 even if the variable display result is out of order. By determining that the value is any of 4 to 6, it is possible to promote the continuation of the game to the player, but in this feature unit 208SG-3, the reach of the super reach γ is being produced. When the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3, the variable display result becomes a big hit, and the player determines that the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6. However, it is possible to promote the continuation of the game.

Further, in the feature unit 208SG of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-26, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ is out of alignment. When the variable display is executed in (PA2-4), if the cut-in effect is determined to be executed in the pattern CI-1 or the pattern CI-2, which is an effect pattern with a low expectation of a big hit, the cut-in effect is executed. Illustrates a mode in which the advance notice effect can be executed by the pattern YE-3 at a higher rate than when the execution by the pattern CI-3, which is an effect pattern with a high expectation of a big hit, is determined. The present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIGS. 8-36 (A) to 8-36 (C) as the modified example 208SG-4, the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are 4 to 6. When the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern (PA2-4) out of the super reach γ, the cut-in effect is decided to be executed in the pattern CI-3, which is an effect pattern with a high expectation of a big hit. If this is the case, the cut-in effect is a production pattern with a low expectation of a big hit. It may be feasible. By doing so, when the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 during the reach effect of the super reach γ, and when the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-1 or the pattern CI-2. By executing the advance notice effect in the pattern YE-3 at a higher rate than that, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing in advance that the variable display result is out of order, so that the variable display result can be obtained. It is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not it will be a big hit, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

Further, in the feature unit 208SG of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-21 (C) to 8-21 (E), the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6. And when the variable display is executed with the fluctuation pattern (PA2-4) out of the super reach γ, if the gaming state is the high accuracy and high base state, the gaming state is low if the set values are the same. Although the embodiment in which the cut-in effect can be performed by the pattern CI-3 at a higher rate than in the case of the low accuracy base state or the low accuracy high base state is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and is a modification. As shown in FIG. 8-37 as 208SG-5, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, and is variably displayed by the fluctuation pattern (PA2-4) of the super reach γ deviation. When is executed, if the gaming state is a low-accuracy low-base state or a low-accuracy high-base state, if the set values are the same, the gaming state is cut at a higher rate than when the gaming state is in the high-accuracy high-base state. The in-effect may be executed by the pattern CI-3.

By doing so, when the gaming state is the low-accuracy low-base state or the low-accuracy high-base state, the rate during the reach production of the super reach γ is higher than that when the gaming state is the high-accuracy high-base state. Since the cut-in effect is easily executed by the pattern CI-3, for example, the variable display result does not become a big hit for a long period of time (for example, 1000 variable displays) in the low accuracy low base state, so that the player When the motivation to continue the game is reduced, the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3, that is, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 4 to 6. Is notified to the player, so that the player's willingness to continue playing the game can be improved, so that the game interest in the low-accuracy low-base state and the low-accuracy high-base state can be improved.

In the present modification 208SG-5, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, and the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern (PA2-4) of the super reach γ deviation. When the gaming state is the low accuracy low base state or the low accuracy high base state, if the set values are the same, the cut-in effect is produced at a higher rate than when the gaming state is the high accuracy high base state. Although the embodiment that can be performed by the pattern CI-3 is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 as a modification 208SG-6 as shown in FIG. 8-38. When the set value is any of 4 to 6 and the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern (PA2-4) out of the super reach γ, the gaming state is the low probability low base state or the low probability high base state. If this is the case, the cut-in effect can be executed by the pattern CI-3, while if the gaming state is the high-accuracy and high-base state, the cut-in effect may be disabled by the pattern CI-3. By doing so, the cut-in effect can be executed by the pattern CI-3 during the reach effect of the super reach γ only when the game state is the low accuracy low base state or the low accuracy high base state, so that the accuracy is high. Since it is possible to draw the player's attention to the low-determined base state and the low-accuracy high-base state, in which the variable display result is less likely to be a big hit than the high-based state, the game entertainment of these low-determined base state and low-accuracy high-base state Can be improved.

Further, in the feature unit 208SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the cut-in effect can be executed during the reach effect of the super reach γ and the super reach δ is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as shown in FIGS. 8-40 (A) and 8-40 (B) as the modified example 208SG-7, during the reach production of the super reach γ and the super reach δ, the pachinko game is performed instead of the cut-in effect. The set value suggestion effect suggesting the set value set in the machine 1 may be executable. In this way, when the set value suggestion effect can be executed during the reach effect of the super reach γ or the super reach δ, the period before the executable period (during the reach effect) of the set value suggestion effect (for example). , The period from the start of the variable display to the reach), the above-mentioned advance notice effect may be executed, and the execution rate of the set value suggestion effect may be different depending on the effect pattern of the advance notice effect.

Specifically, when the advance notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-3 or the pattern YE-4, the set value is higher than that in the case where the advance notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-1 or the pattern YE-2. It suffices to make the suggestion effect feasible. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to which effect pattern the advance notice effect is executed in, and when the advance notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-3 or the pattern YE-4, , Since the player can pay attention to whether or not the set value suggestion effect is executed during the reach effect, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the set value suggestion effect.

(Explanation of feature section 027SH)
Next, a gaming machine related to the feature unit 027SH will be described. The gaming machine according to the feature unit 027SH is a gaming machine capable of playing a game. In this embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine 1 capable of playing a game will be described as an example.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH includes a game control means and an effect executing means. The game control means is realized by, for example, the CPU 103 of the main board 11. The effect execution means is realized by, for example, the effect control CPU 120 of the effect control board 12. The effect executing means can execute various effects (for example, various notice effects, item image effects, etc., which will be described later).

FIG. 9-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH of the present embodiment. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH is provided with a movable body 027SH 32, which is an accessory, in the vicinity of the image display device 5, for example, as shown in FIG. 9-1. The movable body 027SH32 has a first state (initial state) and a second state (tilted state) as shown in FIGS. 9-6 (E) to 9-6 (G) under the control of the effect control board 12. Works between. For example, the movable body 027SH32 operates in the order of the first state → the second state → the first state, or operates in the order of the first state → the second state → the first state → the second state → the first state, or the first state. → State between 1st state and 2nd state (temporarily stopped) → 2nd state → 1st state and operation, 1st state → State between 1st state and 2nd state (temporarily stopped) → It may operate with the first state. The other configurations of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 027SH in the gaming board 2 are the same as the configurations of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature portion 208SG shown in FIG. 8-1. Is omitted.

FIG. 9-2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the hit probability of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH. Specifically, FIG. 9-2 (A) shows the jackpot probability and the small hit probability for each set value (set values "1" to "6") when the gaming state is in the low probability state. FIG. 9-2 (B) shows the jackpot probability and the small hit probability for each set value (set values “1” to “6”) when the gaming state is in the highly accurate state. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 027SH is classified into a gaming state (whether it is in a low probability state or a high probability state) and a set value (a set value “1” to “6”). In addition, a plurality of types of display result judgment tables for special figures corresponding to each (for each, the big hit judgment value and the small hit probability so as to be the big hit probability and the small hit probability as shown in FIGS. 9-2 (A) and 9-2 (A) and (B)). Twelve types of display result determination tables for special figures to which hit determination values are assigned) are stored. For example, the CPU 103 determines the above-mentioned plurality of types of display result for special figures in the winning random number value determination process. It is sufficient to judge whether it is a big hit or a small hit (whether it is a miss) by using one of the corresponding special figure display result determination tables.

FIG. 9-2 (C) shows the types of jackpots. FIG. 9-2 (D) shows the distribution of jackpots for the first special symbol. FIG. 9-2 (E) shows the distribution of jackpots for the second special symbol. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 027SH has a plurality of types of jackpot type determination tables (each of which corresponds to a first special symbol or a second special symbol). , The judgment value corresponding to the first big hit, the judgment value corresponding to the second big hit, and the judgment value corresponding to the third big hit are assigned so as to be sorted as shown in FIGS. 9-2 (D) and 9-2 (E). Two types of jackpot type determination tables) are stored, and for example, when the CPU 103 determines in the winning random number value determination process that a jackpot will be achieved based on the special figure display result determination table, the above-mentioned plurality of The type of jackpot (big hit type) may be determined by using one of the jackpot type determination tables corresponding to the type of jackpot type determination table.

FIG. 9-3 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH. FIG. 9-3 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the types of fluctuation patterns (fluctuation times). Fluctuation pattern # 10 is a non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern. The fluctuation pattern # 11 is a non-reach out-of-reach (for shortening) fluctuation pattern. Fluctuation pattern # 12 is a fluctuation pattern that is out of normal reach. Fluctuation pattern # 13 is a fluctuation pattern that develops from normal reach to super reach A and finally becomes out of order. Fluctuation pattern # 14 is a fluctuation pattern that develops from normal reach to super reach B and finally becomes out of order. Fluctuation pattern # 15 is a fluctuation pattern of small hits. The fluctuation pattern # 16 is a fluctuation pattern of the normal reach jackpot. Fluctuation pattern # 17 is a fluctuation pattern that develops from normal reach to super reach A and finally becomes a big hit. Fluctuation pattern # 18 is a fluctuation pattern that develops from normal reach to super reach B and finally becomes a big hit.

FIG. 9-3 (B) is an example of the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern. The expectation (reliability) of the jackpot is Super Reach B> Super Reach A> Normal Reach. The jackpot expectation of a certain effect a is, for example, (probability that effect a is executed when it becomes a big hit) × (probability that it becomes a big hit) / {(probability that effect a is executed when it becomes a big hit) × ( Calculated by (probability of becoming a big hit) + (probability that production a is executed when a big hit does not occur) x (probability of not becoming a big hit)} Become).

For example, the reliability of Super Reach A is (0.3 × 1/320) / {(0.3 × 1/320) + (0.009 × 319/320)} = about when the set value is 1. It is 9.5%. Further, the reliability of Super Reach A is (0.3 × 1/295) / {(0.3 × 1/295) + (0.009 × 294/295)} = about when the set value is 6. It is 10.2%.

Further, the reliability of Super Reach B is (0.6 × 1/320) / {(0.6 × 1/320) + (0.001 × 319/320)} = about when the set value is 1. It is 65.3%. Further, the reliability of Super Reach B is (0.6 × 1/295) / {(0.6 × 1/295) + (0.001 × 294/295)} = about when the set value is 6. It is 67.1%.

According to the example of FIG. 9-3 (B), the fluctuation pattern # 11 is not determined during the low base, but for example, the fluctuation pattern # 11 is determined even during the low base according to the number of reserved memories. You may do it. Further, according to the example of FIG. 9-3 (B), the fluctuation pattern # 10 is not determined during the high base, but for example, the fluctuation pattern # 10 is determined even during the high base according to the number of reserved memories. You may do it.

FIG. 9-4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the advance notice effect. 9-5 and 9-6 are production examples of the respective notice effects. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH can execute a plurality of types of advance notice effects as shown in FIG. 9-4. In this embodiment, each of the plurality of types of advance notice effects can be specified by the advance notice effect patterns.

The notice effect of the notice effect pattern "YEP-A1" shown in FIG. 9-4 is a cut-in notice effect (display of a weak cut-in image). The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH is, for example, as shown in FIG. 9-5 (A) as a notice effect (cut-in notice effect / display of a weak cut-in image) of the notice effect pattern “YEP-A1”. , Weak cut-in image 027SHYKE-JCI is displayed.

The notice effect of the notice effect pattern "YEP-A2" shown in FIG. 9-4 is a cut-in notice effect (display of a strong cut-in image). The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH is, for example, as shown in FIG. 9-5 (B) as a notice effect (cut-in notice effect / display of a strong cut-in image) of the notice effect pattern “YEP-A2”. , Strong cut-in image 027SHYKE-KCI is displayed.

The notice effect of the notice effect pattern "YEP-B" shown in FIG. 9-4 is a group notice effect (display of a group image). The pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 027SH displays a group image 027SHYKE-GN as, for example, as shown in FIG. 9-5 (C), as a notice effect (group notice effect) of the notice effect pattern “YEP-B”. do.

The notice effect of the notice effect pattern "YEP-C1" shown in FIG. 9-4 is a button notice effect (display of button image → press → weak cut-in image). The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH is shown in FIGS. 9-6 (A) and 9-6 (B), for example, as a notice effect (button notice effect / display of a weak cut-in image) of the notice effect pattern “YEP-C1”. Such, the button image 027SHYKE-BU and the weak cut-in image 027SHYKE-JCI are displayed. The weak cut-in image displayed in the button notice effect may be different from the weak cut-in image displayed in the cut-in notice effect.

The notice effect of the notice effect pattern "YEP-C2" shown in FIG. 9-4 is a button notice effect (display of button image → press → strong cut-in image). The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH is shown in FIGS. 9-6 (C) and 9-6 (D), for example, as a notice effect (button notice effect / display of a strong cut-in image) of the notice effect pattern “YEP-C2”. Such, the button image 027SHYKE-BU and the strong cut-in image 027SHYKE-KCI are displayed. The strong cut-in image displayed in the button notice effect may be different from the strong cut-in image displayed in the cut-in notice effect.

The notice effect of the notice effect pattern "YEP-D" shown in FIG. 9-4 is a character advance notice effect (operation of the character). The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH has, for example, as shown in FIGS. The movable body 027SH32 is operated.

FIG. 9-7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the determination ratio of the advance notice effect and the like. FIG. 9-7 (A) is an example of a determination ratio of whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect (display of a weak cut-in image or display of a strong cut-in image). According to the example shown in FIG. 9-7 (A), when the super reach is out of order (when the fluctuation pattern is either # 13 or # 14), the execution presence is determined at a rate of 40%, and the super reach jackpot is determined. In the case of (when either the fluctuation pattern # 17 or # 18 is satisfied), the execution presence is determined at a rate of 50%. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 027SH executes a cut-in notice effect execution presence / absence determination table for super reach loss, which allocates 40% of the total as a judgment value corresponding to execution existence, and 50% of the total. The cut-in notice effect execution presence / absence determination table for the super reach jackpot assigned as the judgment value corresponding to Yes is stored. For example, the effect control CPU 120 is for super reach loss when the super reach is lost. Use the cut-in notice effect execution presence / absence determination table to determine whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect, and if it becomes a super reach jackpot, use the cut-in notice effect execution presence / absence determination table for the super reach jackpot to make a cut-in notice. You may decide whether or not to execute the effect. The same applies to the determination of whether or not to execute other notice effects (group notice effect, button notice effect, character advance notice effect). If it does not become super reach (if it becomes any of fluctuation patterns # 10, # 11, # 12, # 15, and # 16), it is determined at a rate of 0% that it is executed (determined not to be executed). ).

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 027SH decides to execute the cut-in notice effect, it determines the notice effect pattern (“YEP-A1”, “YEP-A2”) related to the cut-in notice effect. FIG. 9-7 (B) is an example of the determination ratio of the notice effect pattern (“YEP-A1”, “YEP-A2”) of the cut-in notice effect when it is decided to execute the cut-in notice effect. According to the example shown in FIG. 9-7 (B), when the super reach is lost, the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-A1" is determined at a rate of 80%, and the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-A2" is 20. Determined at a rate of%. In the case of a super reach jackpot, the notice effect pattern "YEP-A1" is determined at a rate of 20%, and the notice effect pattern "YEP-A2" is determined at a rate of 80%. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 027SH allocates 80% of the whole as a determination value corresponding to the notice effect pattern "YEP-A1" and 20% of the whole corresponds to the notice effect pattern "YEP-A2". A cut-in notice effect pattern determination table for out of super reach assigned as a judgment value, 20% of the whole is assigned as a judgment value corresponding to the notice effect pattern "YEP-A1", and 80% of the whole is assigned as a notice effect pattern "YEP-A1". The cut-in notice effect pattern determination table for the super reach jackpot, which is assigned as the determination value corresponding to "YEP-A2", is stored. For example, the effect control CPU 120 super reach when the super reach is lost. Use the cut-in notice effect pattern determination table for out-of-order to determine the advance notice effect pattern for the cut-in advance notice effect, and if it becomes a super reach jackpot, cut in using the cut-in advance notice effect pattern determination table for the super reach jackpot. The notice production pattern of the notice effect may be determined. The same applies to the determination of the advance notice effect pattern of other advance notice effects (button advance notice effects).

FIG. 9-7 (C) is an example of the determination ratio of whether or not to execute the group notice effect (display of the group image). According to the example shown in FIG. 9-7 (C), when the super reach is out of order, the execution rate is determined at a rate of 20%, and when the super reach jackpot is achieved, the execution rate is determined at a rate of 50%. do. Further, since there is only one type of advance notice effect pattern related to the group advance notice effect (notice effect pattern "YEP-B"), the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 027SH decides to execute the group advance notice effect. The advance notice effect pattern "YEP-B" is determined as the advance notice effect pattern related to the effect. If it does not reach super reach, it is decided that there is execution at a rate of 0% (it is decided not to execute).

FIG. 9-7 (D) shows the determination ratio of whether or not to execute the button notice effect (display of button image → press → display of weak cut-in image, or display of button image → press → display of strong cut-in image). This is an example. According to the example shown in FIG. 9-7 (D), when the super reach is out of order, the execution rate is determined at a rate of 10%, and when the super reach jackpot is achieved, the execution rate is determined at a rate of 50%. do. If it does not reach super reach, it is decided that there is execution at a rate of 0% (it is decided not to execute).

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 027SH decides to execute the button notice effect, it determines the notice effect pattern (“YEP-C1”, “YEP-C2”) related to the button notice effect. FIG. 9-7 (E) is an example of the determination ratio of the advance notice effect patterns (“YEP-C1” and “YEP-C2”) related to the button advance notice effect when it is decided to execute the button advance notice effect. According to the example shown in FIG. 9-7 (E), when the super reach is out of order, the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-C1" is determined at a rate of 90%, and the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-C2" is set to 10. Determined at a rate of%. Further, in the case of a super reach jackpot, the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-C1" is determined at a rate of 10%, and the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-C2" is determined at a rate of 90%.

FIG. 9-7 (F) is an example of the determination ratio of whether or not to execute the bonus notice effect (movement of the bonus). According to the example shown in FIG. 9-7 (F), when the super reach is out of order, the execution rate is determined at a rate of 5%, and when the super reach jackpot is achieved, the execution rate is determined at a rate of 75%. do. Further, since there is only one type of advance notice effect pattern related to the character advance notice effect (notice effect pattern "YEP-D"), when the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 027SH decides to execute the character advance notice effect, The notice effect pattern "YEP-D" is determined as the advance notice effect pattern related to the character advance notice effect. If it does not reach super reach, it is decided that there is execution at a rate of 0% (it is decided not to execute).

According to FIG. 9-7, in the case of super reach, a maximum of four types of advance notice effects are executed.

In addition, the probability that the cut-in notice effect (display of weak cut-in image or display of strong cut-in image) will be executed when it becomes super reach is {(probability of loss × super reach when it is out). Probability of becoming x Probability of performing a cut-in notice effect when the super reach is off) + (Probability of becoming a big hit x Probability of becoming a super reach when a big hit x Super reach The cut-in notice effect is executed when a big hit Probability)} / {(Probability of losing x Probability of becoming super reach when losing) + (Probability of becoming a big hit x Probability of becoming super reach when hitting a big hit)} When the set value is 1, { (319/320 x 1% x 40%) + (1/320 x 90% x 50%)} / {(319/320 x 1%) + (1/320 x 90%)} = about 42%. ..

In addition, the probability that the group notice effect (display of the group image) will be executed when the super reach is reached is {(probability of losing x probability of becoming super reach when out of the way x group notice effect when the super reach is out of the way). Probability of being executed) + (Probability of becoming a big hit x Probability of becoming a super reach at the time of a big hit x Probability of executing a group notice effect at the time of a super reach big hit)} / {(Probability of being missed x Probability of being missed) (Probability of becoming a super reach) + (Probability of becoming a big hit x Probability of becoming a super reach at the time of a big hit)} When the set value is 1, {(319/320 x 1% x 20%) + (1) / 320 × 90% × 50%)} / {(319/320 × 1%) + (1/320 × 90%)} = about 26%.

In addition, the probability that the button notice effect (display of button image-> press-> display of weak cut-in image or display of button image-> press-> display of strong cut-in image) will be executed at the time of super reach is { (Probability of losing x Probability of becoming super reach when missing x Probability of executing button notice effect when super reach is out) + (Probability of becoming a big hit x Probability of becoming super reach when hitting a big hit x Super reach Probability that the button notice effect will be executed at the time of a big hit)} / {(Probability of becoming a miss x Probability of becoming a super reach at the time of losing) + (Probability of becoming a big hit x Probability of becoming a super reach at the time of a big hit)} Calculated from, in the case of the set value 1, {(319/320 × 1% × 10%) + (1/320 × 90% × 50%)} / {(319/320 × 1%) + (1/320) × 90%)} = about 19%.

In addition, the probability that the character advance notice effect (action of the character) will be executed when it becomes super reach is {(probability of losing x probability of becoming super reach when it is out x character when it is out of super reach). Probability of executing the notice effect) + (Probability of becoming a big hit x Probability of becoming a super reach at the time of a big hit x Probability of executing the character advance notice effect at the time of a super reach big hit)} / {(Probability of losing) Calculated from (probability of becoming a super reach when out of the game) + (probability of becoming a big hit x probability of becoming a super reach when a big hit)}, when the set value is 1, {(319/320 x 1% x 5%) + (1/320 x 90% x 75%)} / {(319/320 x 1%) + (1/320 x 90%)} = about 20%.

FIG. 9-8 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the item image effect. FIG. 9-9 is a display example of each item image. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH can execute a plurality of types of item image effects as shown in FIG. 9-8 (A).

The item image advance notice effect of the item image effect pattern "IGEP-A" shown in FIG. 9-8 (A) is an item image suggesting that the cut-in advance notice effect (YEP-A1 or YEP-A2) is executed. It is an item image effect A that displays A. In other words, the item image A displayed in the item image effect A can specify the type of advance notice effect to be executed (specifically, the cut-in advance notice effect).

In the item image effect A, the strength (high or low reliability) of suggestion that the cut-in notice effect is executed differs depending on the display mode (first to third display modes) of the item image A.

Specifically, the item image A of the first display mode (level 1) is a weak suggestion that weakly suggests that the cut-in notice effect is executed. That is, the item image A of the first display mode suggests whether the cut-in notice effect is executed with low reliability. The item image 027SHIGALV1 shown in FIG. 9-9 (A) is an example of the first display mode (level 1) of the item image A. In this embodiment, the first display mode (level 1) of the item image A (the same applies to the item image B to the item image D) is blue.

The item image A of the second display mode (level 2) is a medium suggestion that moderately suggests that the cut-in notice effect is executed. That is, the item image A in the second display mode suggests whether the cut-in notice effect is executed with a moderate degree of reliability. The item image 027SHIGALV2 shown in FIG. 9-9 (B) is an example of the second display mode (level 2) of the item image A. In this embodiment, the second display mode (level 2) of the item image A (the same applies to the item image B to the item image D) is green.

The item image A of the third display mode (level 3) is a strong suggestion that strongly suggests that the cut-in notice effect is executed. That is, the item image A in the third display mode suggests with high reliability whether the cut-in notice effect is executed. The item image 027SHIGALV3 shown in FIG. 9-9 (C) is an example of the third display mode (level 3) of the item image A. In this embodiment, the third display mode (level 3) of the item image A (the same applies to the item image B to the item image D) is red.

The item image advance notice effect of the item image effect pattern "IGEP-B" shown in FIG. 9-8 (A) is an item that displays an item image B suggesting that the group advance notice effect (YEP-B) is executed. Image production B. In other words, the item image B displayed in the item image effect B can specify the type of the advance notice effect to be executed (specifically, the group advance notice effect).

In the item image effect B, the strength (high or low reliability) of suggestion that the group notice effect is executed differs depending on the display mode (first to third display modes) of the item image B.

Specifically, the item image B of the first display mode (level 1) is a weak suggestion that weakly suggests that the group notice effect is executed. That is, the item image B of the first display mode suggests whether the group notice effect is executed with low reliability. The item image 027SHIGBLV1 shown in FIG. 9-9 (D) is an example of the first display mode (level 1) of the item image B.

The item image B of the second display mode (level 2) is a medium suggestion that moderately suggests that the group notice effect is executed. That is, the item image B of the second display mode suggests whether the group notice effect is executed with a moderate degree of reliability. The item image 027SHIGBLV2 shown in FIG. 9-9 (E) is an example of the second display mode (level 2) of the item image B.

The item image B of the third display mode (level 3) is a strong suggestion that strongly suggests that the group notice effect is executed. That is, the item image B in the third display mode suggests with high reliability whether the group notice effect is executed. The item image 027SHIGBLV3 shown in FIG. 9-9 (F) is an example of the third display mode (level 3) of the item image B.

The item image advance notice effect of the item image effect pattern "IGEP-C" shown in FIG. 9-8 (A) suggests that the button advance notice effect (YEP-C1 or YEP-C2) is executed. Is an item image effect C for displaying. In other words, the item image C displayed in the item image effect C can specify the type of the advance notice effect to be executed (specifically, the button advance notice effect).

In the item image effect C, the strength (high or low reliability) of suggestion that the button notice effect is executed differs depending on the display mode (first to third display modes) of the item image C.

Specifically, the item image C of the first display mode (level 1) is a weak suggestion that weakly suggests that the button notice effect is executed. That is, the item image C of the first display mode suggests whether or not the button notice effect is executed with low reliability. The item image 027SHIGCLV1 shown in FIG. 9-9 (G) is an example of the first display mode (level 1) of the item image C.

The item image C of the second display mode (level 2) is a medium suggestion that moderately suggests that the button notice effect is executed. That is, the item image C of the second display mode suggests whether or not the button notice effect is executed with a moderate degree of reliability. The item image 027SHIGCLV2 shown in FIG. 9-9 (H) is an example of the second display mode (level 2) of the item image C.

The item image C of the third display mode (level 3) is a strong suggestion that strongly suggests that the button notice effect is executed. That is, the item image C in the third display mode suggests with high reliability whether or not the button notice effect is executed. The item image 027SHIGCLV3 shown in FIG. 9-9 (I) is an example of the third display mode (level 3) of the item image C.

The item image advance notice effect of the item image effect pattern "IGEP-D" shown in FIG. 9-8 (A) displays the item image D suggesting that the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is executed. Item image production D. In other words, the item image D displayed in the item image effect D can specify the type of the advance notice effect to be executed (specifically, the character advance notice effect).

In the item image effect D, the strength (high or low reliability) of suggestion that the accessory notice effect is executed differs depending on the display mode (first to third display modes) of the item image D.

Specifically, the item image D of the first display mode (level 1) is a weak suggestion that weakly suggests that the character advance notice effect is executed. That is, the item image D in the first display mode suggests with low reliability whether or not the character advance notice effect is executed. The item image 027SHIGDLV1 shown in FIG. 9-9 (J) is an example of the first display mode (level 1) of the item image D.

The item image D of the second display mode (level 2) is a medium suggestion that moderately suggests that the character advance notice effect is executed. That is, the item image D in the second display mode suggests whether or not the character advance notice effect is executed with a moderate degree of reliability. The item image 027SHIGDLV2 shown in FIG. 9-9 (K) is an example of the second display mode (level 2) of the item image D.

The item image D of the third display mode (level 3) is a strong suggestion that strongly suggests that the character advance notice effect is executed. That is, the item image D in the third display mode suggests with high reliability whether or not the character advance notice effect is executed. The item image 027SHIGDLV3 shown in FIG. 9-9 (L) is an example of the third display mode (level 3) of the item image D.

The pachinko game machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH has an item image effect A (IGEP-A), an item image effect B (IGEP-B), and an item image effect C (IGEP-C) shown in FIG. 9-8 (A). , Item image production D (IGEP-D) 4 types of item image production may not execute even one of the four types, or only one of the four types may be executed. Two of the four types may be executed, three of the four types may be executed, or all four types may be executed.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH can change the display mode of the item image to be displayed in the item image production. In other words, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH can execute the item image effect that changes the display mode of the item image. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH may change the display mode of the item image A from the first display mode (level 1) to the second display mode (level 2) during the execution of the item image effect A. It is possible. In other words, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH can execute the item image effect A that changes the display mode of the item image A from the first display mode (level 1) to the second display mode (level 2). be. The same applies to the item image effect B, the item image effect C, and the item image effect D.

FIG. 9-8 (B) shows the contents of the item image effect execution mode pattern. The item image production execution mode pattern is common to each item image production (item image production A, item image production B, item image production C, item image production D), and is any one for each item image production. Item image effect execution mode pattern is determined (details will be described later).

The item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP1” shown in FIG. 9-8 (B) is an item image effect execution mode pattern that does not execute the item image effect. Since the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP1" does not execute the item image effect, the item image is not displayed.

The item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP2” shown in FIG. 9-8 (B) is an item image effect execution mode pattern for executing the item image effect, and the display mode of the item image is set to the first display mode (level). This is an item image effect execution mode pattern that does not change as it is in 1).

The item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP3” shown in FIG. 9-8 (B) is an item image effect execution mode pattern for executing the item image effect, and the display mode of the item image is set to the first display mode (level). This is an item image effect execution mode pattern for changing from 1) to the second display mode (level 2).

The item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP4” shown in FIG. 9-8 (B) is an item image effect execution mode pattern for executing the item image effect, and the display mode of the item image is set to the first display mode (level). It is an item image effect execution mode pattern that changes from 1) to the second display mode (level 2) and further changes from the second display mode (level 2) to the third display mode (level 3).

The item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP5” shown in FIG. 9-8 (B) is an item image effect execution mode pattern for executing the item image effect, and the display mode of the item image is set to the first display mode (level). This is an item image effect execution mode pattern for changing from 1) to the third display mode (level 3).

Therefore, although the details will be described later, for example, the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP3” is determined for the item image effect A (IGEP-A), and the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEP-B” is determined for the item image effect B (IGEP-B). "IGEGP1" is determined, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP2" is determined for the item image effect C (IGEP-C), and the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP5" is determined for the item image effect D (IGEP-D). If so, the item image effect A (IGEP-A) that changes the display mode of the item image A from the first display mode (level 1) to the second display mode (level 2), and the display mode of the item image C. The item image effect C (IGEP-C) that does not change the first display mode (level 1) and the display mode of the item image D are changed from the first display mode (level 1) to the third display mode (level 3). The item image effect D (IGEP-D) to be caused is executed (the item image effect B is not executed).

FIG. 9-10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the determination ratio of the item image effect and the like. 9-10 (A) and 9-10 (B) are examples of the determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect A (IGEP-A). Specifically, FIG. 9-10 (A) shows the item image effect execution of the item image effect A (IGEP-A) when the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1, YEP-A2) is executed in the super reach. This is an example of the determination ratio of the aspect pattern. FIG. 9-10 (B) shows the determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect A (IGEP-A) when the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1, YEP-A2) is not executed in the super reach. This is an example.

9-10 (C) and 9-10 (D) are examples of the determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B (IGEP-B). Specifically, FIG. 9-10 (C) shows the determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B (IGEP-B) when the group notice effect (YEP-B) is executed in the super reach. This is an example. FIG. 9-10 (D) is an example of the determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B (IGEP-B) when the group notice effect (YEP-B) is not executed in the super reach.

9-10 (E) and 9-10 (F) are examples of the determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C (IGEP-C). Specifically, FIG. 9-10 (E) shows an item image effect execution mode of the item image effect C (IGEP-C) when the button notice effect (YEP-C1, YEP-C2) is executed in the super reach. This is an example of the pattern determination ratio. FIG. 9-10 (F) shows the determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C (IGEP-C) when the button notice effect (YEP-C1, YEP-C2) is not executed in the super reach. This is an example.

9-10 (G) and 9-10 (H) are examples of the determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D (IGEP-D). Specifically, FIG. 9-10 (G) determines the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D (IGEP-D) when the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is executed in the super reach. This is an example of the ratio. FIG. 9-10 (H) is an example of the determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D (IGEP-D) when the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is not executed in the super reach. ..

According to FIG. 9-10, the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect A that displays the item image A and suggests the execution of the cut-in notice effect (that is, whether the item image effect A is executed or the item). The display mode of the item image A when the image effect A is executed) is determined by whether or not the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1, YEP-A2) is executed. Further, the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B that displays the item image B and suggests the execution of the group notice effect (that is, whether the item image effect B is executed or the item image effect B is executed) is executed. The display mode of the item image B in the case) is determined by whether or not the group notice effect (YEP-B) is executed. Further, the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C that displays the item image C and suggests the execution of the button notice effect (that is, whether the item image effect C is executed or the item image effect C is executed) is executed. The display mode of the item image C in the case) is determined by whether or not the button notice effect (YEP-C1, YEP-C2) is executed. In addition, the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D that displays the item image D and suggests the execution of the character advance notice effect (that is, whether the item image effect D is executed or the item image effect D is executed). The display mode of the item image D in this case) is determined by whether or not the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is executed.

As specific examples, the reliability of the suggestion of the cut-in notice effect for each display mode of the item image A displayed in the item image effect A, and the button notice effect for each display mode of the item image C displayed in the item image effect C. The reliability of the suggestion will be explained.

(Reliability of suggestion of cut-in notice effect for each display mode of item image A)
According to FIGS. 9-10 (A) and 9-10 (B), the final display mode of the item image A is the third display mode (level 3) of the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP4”. Is determined. When the cut-in notice effect is executed, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" is determined at a rate of 50% (Fig. 9-10 (A)), and when the cut-in notice effect is not executed, 10%. The item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" is determined by the ratio (FIG. 9-10 (B)). The reliability of the cut-in notice effect when the final display mode of the item image A in the super reach is the third display mode is, for example, (when the cut-in notice effect is executed in the super reach, the third display mode Item image A is finally displayed) × (Probability that the cut-in notice effect is executed in the super reach) / {Item image of the third display mode when the cut-in notice effect is executed in the super reach Probability that A is finally displayed) × (Probability that cut-in notice effect is executed in super reach) + (Item image A in the third display mode is final when cut-in notice effect is not executed in super reach) Probability displayed in) × (Probability that the cut-in notice effect is not executed in Super Reach)}. When 42% of the set value 1 is used as the probability that the cut-in notice effect is executed in the super reach, the cut-in notice effect when the final display mode of the item image A is the third display mode in the super reach. The reliability is (50% × 42%) / {(50% × 42%) + (10% × 58%)} = about 78%.

The final display mode of the item image A becomes the second display mode (level 2) when the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP3” is determined. When the cut-in notice effect is executed, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP3" is determined at a rate of 30% (Fig. 9-10 (A)), and when the cut-in notice effect is not executed, 20%. The item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP3" is determined by the ratio (FIG. 9-10 (B)). Therefore, when 42% of the set value 1 is used as the probability that the cut-in notice effect is executed in the super reach, the cut-in notice when the final display mode of the item image A is the second display mode in the super reach. The reliability of the production is (30% × 42%) / {(30% × 42%) + (20% × 58%)} = about 52%.

The final display mode of the item image A becomes the first display mode (level 1) when the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP2” is determined. When the cut-in notice effect is executed, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP2" is determined at a rate of 20% (Fig. 9-10 (A)), and when the cut-in notice effect is not executed, 60%. The item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP2" is determined by the ratio (FIG. 9-10 (B)). Therefore, when 42% of the set value 1 is used as the probability that the cut-in notice effect is executed in the super reach, the cut-in notice when the final display mode of the item image A is the first display mode in the super reach. The reliability of the production is (20% × 42%) / {(20% × 42%) + (60% × 58%)} = about 19%.

(Reliability of suggestion of button notice effect for each display mode of item image C)
According to FIGS. 9-10 (E) and 9-10 (F), the final display mode of the item image C is the third display mode (level 3), which is the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP4”. Or when "IGEGP5" is determined. When the button notice effect is executed, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" or "IGEGP5" is determined at a rate of 70% in total (FIG. 9-10 (E)), and when the button notice effect is not executed, The item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" is determined at a rate of 5% (FIG. 9-10 (F)). The reliability of the button notice effect when the final display mode of the item image C in the super reach is the third display mode is, for example, (the item of the third display mode when the button notice effect is executed in the super reach). Probability that image C is finally displayed) × (Probability that button notice effect is executed in super reach) / {Item image C in the third display mode is finally displayed when button notice effect is executed in super reach. (Probability of being displayed in) × (Probability that the button notice effect is executed in Super Reach) + (Probability that the item image C in the third display mode is finally displayed when the button notice effect is not executed in Super Reach) It is calculated by × (probability that the button notice effect is not executed in Super Reach)}. When 19% of the set value 1 is used as the probability that the button notice effect is executed in the super reach, the reliability of the button notice effect when the final display mode of the item image C in the super reach is the third display mode. Is (70% × 19%) / {(70% × 19%) + (5% × 81%)} = about 77%.

The final display mode of the item image C becomes the second display mode (level 2) when the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP3” is determined. When the button notice effect is executed, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP3" is determined at a rate of 15% (Fig. 9-10 (E)), and when the button notice effect is not executed, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP3" is determined at a rate of 10%. The item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP3” is determined (FIG. 9-10 (F)). Therefore, when 19% of the set value 1 is used as the probability that the button notice effect is executed in the super reach, the button notice effect when the final display mode of the item image C in the super reach is the second display mode. The reliability is (15% × 19%) / {(15% × 19%) + (10% × 81%)} = about 26%.

The final display mode of the item image C becomes the first display mode (level 1) when the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP2" is determined. When the button notice effect is executed, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP2" is determined at a rate of 10% (Fig. 9-10 (E)), and when the button notice effect is not executed, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP2" is determined at a rate of 65%. The item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP2” is determined (FIG. 9-10 (F)). Therefore, when 19% of the set value 1 is used as the probability that the button notice effect is executed in the super reach, the button notice effect when the final display mode of the item image C in the super reach is the first display mode. The reliability is (10% × 19%) / {(10% × 19%) + (65% × 81%)} = about 3.5%.

FIG. 9-11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating various timings. Specifically, FIG. 9-11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display timing of various item images, the execution timing of various notice effects, and the like in the variable display that becomes super reach.

In FIG. 9-11, T0 is the start timing during the variable display. T1 is the timing to develop into super reach.

T2 is the timing at which the item image A (see FIG. 9-9 (A)) of the first display mode (level 1) is displayed when the item image effect A is executed. When the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect A is any of "IGEGP2" to "IGEGP5", the item image A is displayed in the first display mode (level 1) in the T2.

T3 is the timing at which the item image B (see FIG. 9-9 (D)) of the first display mode (level 1) is displayed when the item image effect B is executed. When the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B is any of "IGEGP2" to "IGEGP5", the item image B is displayed in the first display mode (level 1) in the T3.

T4 is the timing at which the item image C (see FIG. 9-9 (G)) of the first display mode (level 1) is displayed when the item image effect C is executed. When the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C is any of "IGEGP2" to "IGEGP5", the item image C is displayed in the first display mode (level 1) in the T4.

T5 is the timing at which the item image D (see FIG. 9-9 (J)) of the first display mode (level 1) is displayed when the item image effect D is executed. When the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D is any of "IGEGP2" to "IGEGP5", the item image D is displayed in the first display mode (level 1) in the T5.

T6 is the timing at which the item image A (see FIG. 9-9 (B)) of the second display mode (level 2) is displayed when the item image effect A is executed. For example, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect A is "IGEGP3" or "IGEGP4", the display mode of the item image effect A is the first display mode (level 1) to the second display mode in the T6. It changes to (level 2). When the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect A is "IGEGP2" or "IGEGP5", the display mode of the item image effect A does not change in the T6 (the first display mode (level 1)). Will remain).

T7 is the timing at which the item image B (see FIG. 9-9 (E)) of the second display mode (level 2) is displayed when the item image effect B is executed. For example, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B is "IGEGP3" or "IGEGP4", the display mode of the item image effect B in the T7 is the first display mode (level 1) to the second display mode. It changes to (level 2). When the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B is "IGEGP2" or "IGEGP5", the display mode of the item image effect B does not change in the T7 (the first display mode (level 1)). Will remain).

T8 is the timing at which the item image C (see FIG. 9-9 (H)) of the second display mode (level 2) is displayed when the item image effect C is executed. For example, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C is "IGEGP3" or "IGEGP4", the display mode of the item image effect C is the first display mode (level 1) to the second display mode in the T8. It changes to (level 2). When the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C is "IGEGP2" or "IGEGP5", the display mode of the item image effect C does not change in the T8 (the first display mode (level 1)). Will remain).

T9 is a timing at which the item image D (see FIG. 9-9 (K)) of the second display mode (level 2) is displayed when the item image effect D is executed. For example, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D is "IGEGP3" or "IGEGP4", the display mode of the item image effect D in the T9 is from the first display mode (level 1) to the second display mode. It changes to (level 2). When the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C is "IGEGP2" or "IGEGP5", the display mode of the item image effect D does not change in the T8 (the first display mode (level 1)). Will remain).

T10 is the timing at which the item image A (see FIG. 9-9 (C)) of the third display mode (level 3) is displayed when the item image effect A is executed. For example, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect A is "IGEGP4", the display mode of the item image effect A in the T10 is changed from the second display mode (level 2) to the third display mode (level 3). When the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect A is "IGEGP5", the display mode of the item image effect A in the T10 is changed from the first display mode (level 1) to the third display mode (level). It changes to 3). When the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect A is "IGEGP2", the display mode of the item image effect A does not change in the T10 (the first display mode (level 1) remains). .. Further, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect A is "IGEGP3", the display mode of the item image effect A does not change in the T10 (the second display mode (level 2) remains). ..

T11 is a timing at which the item image B (see FIG. 9-9 (F)) of the third display mode (level 3) is displayed when the item image effect B is executed. For example, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B is "IGEGP4", the display mode of the item image effect B in the T11 is from the second display mode (level 2) to the third display mode (level 3). When the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B is "IGEGP5", the display mode of the item image effect B in the T11 is changed from the first display mode (level 1) to the third display mode (level). It changes to 3). When the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B is "IGEGP2", the display mode of the item image effect B does not change in the T11 (the first display mode (level 1) remains). .. Further, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B is "IGEGP3", the display mode of the item image effect B does not change in the T11 (the second display mode (level 2) remains). ..

T12 is the timing at which the item image C (see FIG. 9-9 (I)) of the third display mode (level 3) is displayed when the item image effect C is executed. For example, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C is "IGEGP4", the display mode of the item image effect C in the T12 is changed from the second display mode (level 2) to the third display mode (level 3). When the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C is "IGEGP5", the display mode of the item image effect C in the T12 is changed from the first display mode (level 1) to the third display mode (level). It changes to 3). When the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C is "IGEGP2", the display mode of the item image effect C does not change in the T12 (the first display mode (level 1) remains). .. Further, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C is "IGEGP3", the display mode of the item image effect C does not change in the T12 (the second display mode (level 2) remains). ..

T13 is a timing at which the item image D (see FIG. 9-9 (L)) of the third display mode (level 3) is displayed when the item image effect D is executed. For example, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D is "IGEGP4", the display mode of the item image effect D in the T13 is from the second display mode (level 2) to the third display mode (level 3). When the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D is "IGEGP5", the display mode of the item image effect D in the T13 is changed from the first display mode (level 1) to the third display mode (level). It changes to 3). When the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D is "IGEGP2", the display mode of the item image effect D does not change in the T13 (the first display mode (level 1) remains). .. Further, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D is "IGEGP3", the display mode of the item image effect D does not change in the T13 (the second display mode (level 2) remains). ..

T14 is an erasure timing (timing used as an item) of the item image A. That is, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect A is "IGEGP2", the item image A of the first display mode (level 1) being displayed is deleted, and the item image effect execution of the item image effect A is executed. When the aspect pattern is "IGEGP3", the item image A of the second display mode (level 2) being displayed is deleted, and the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect A is "IGEGP4" or "IGEGP5". If there is, the item image A of the third display mode (level 3) being displayed is deleted.

Further, T14 is also a timing to start the execution of the fanning effect for inciting whether to execute the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1, YEP-A2). T15 is the timing at which the execution of the above-mentioned fanning effect is finished. That is, T14 to T15 are execution periods of the above-mentioned fanning effect.

Further, T15 is also a timing for starting the execution of the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1, YEP-A2). T16 is a timing for ending the execution of the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1, YEP-A2). That is, T15 to T16 are execution periods of the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1, YEP-A2).

T17 is the deletion timing of the item image B. That is, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B is "IGEGP2", the item image B of the first display mode (level 1) being displayed is deleted, and the item image effect execution of the item image effect B is executed. When the aspect pattern is "IGEGP3", the item image B of the second display mode (level 2) being displayed is deleted, and the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B is "IGEGP4" or "IGEGP5". If there is, the item image B of the third display mode (level 3) being displayed is deleted.

Further, T17 is also a timing to start the execution of the fanning effect that incites whether to execute the group notice effect (YEP-B). T18 is the timing at which the execution of the above-mentioned fanning effect is finished. That is, T17 to T18 are execution periods of the above-mentioned fanning effect.

The T18 is also the timing to start the execution of the group notice effect (YEP-B). T19 is the timing to end the execution of the group notice effect (YEP-B). That is, T18 to T19 are execution periods of the group notice effect (YEP-B).

T20 is the deletion timing of the item image C. That is, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C is "IGEGP2", the item image C of the first display mode (level 1) being displayed is deleted, and the item image effect execution of the item image effect C is executed. When the aspect pattern is "IGEGP3", the item image C of the second display mode (level 2) being displayed is deleted, and the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C is "IGEGP4" or "IGEGP5". If there is, the item image C of the third display mode (level 3) being displayed is deleted.

Further, T20 is also a timing to start the execution of the fanning effect for inciting whether to execute the button notice effect (YEP-C1, YEP-C2). T21 is the timing at which the execution of the above-mentioned fanning effect is finished. That is, T20 to T21 are execution periods of the above-mentioned fanning effect.

Further, T21 is also a timing for starting the execution of the button notice effect (YEP-C1, YEP-C2). T22 is a timing for ending the execution of the button notice effect (YEP-C1, YEP-C2). That is, T21 to T22 are execution periods of the button notice effect (YEP-C1, YEP-C2).

T23 is the deletion timing of the item image D. That is, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D is "IGEGP2", the item image D of the first display mode (level 1) being displayed is deleted, and the item image effect execution of the item image effect D is executed. When the aspect pattern is "IGEGP3", the item image D of the second display mode (level 2) being displayed is deleted, and the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D is "IGEGP4" or "IGEGP5". If there is, the item image D of the third display mode (level 3) being displayed is deleted.

Further, T23 is also a timing to start the execution of the fanning effect that fuels whether to execute the character advance notice effect (YEP-D). T24 is a timing at which the execution of the above-mentioned fanning effect is finished. That is, T23 to T24 are execution periods of the above-mentioned fanning effect.

Further, T24 is also a timing for starting the execution of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D). T25 is the timing at which the execution of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is finished. That is, T24 to T25 are execution periods of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D).

9-12 and 9-13 are specific examples of various timings. In FIG. 9-12 (A), only the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1) is executed as the advance notice effect, and only the item image effect A (IGEP-A) is executed as the item image effect. When executed in "IGEGP4" (that is, when the item image effect B (IGEP-B), the item image effect C (IGEP-C) and the item image effect D (IGEP-D) are executed, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP1" is used. It is explanatory drawing explaining the display timing of the item image A, the execution timing of the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1), etc. in (in a case).

In FIG. 9-12 (A), T2 to T6 are periods during which the item image A of the first display mode (level 1) is displayed. T6 to T10 are periods during which the item image A of the second display mode (level 2) is displayed. T10 to T14 are periods during which the item image A of the third display mode (level 3) is displayed. T14 to T15 are execution periods of the fanning effect that incites whether to execute the cut-in notice effect. T15 to T16 are execution periods of the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1), that is, a period during which the weak cut-in image 027SHYKE-JCI (see FIG. 9-5 (A)) is displayed.

In FIG. 9-12 (B), nothing is executed as the advance notice effect, and the item image effect A (IGEP-A), the item image effect C (IGEP-C), and the item image effect D (IGEP) are used as the item image effect. Item image A, in the case where each of −D) is executed by the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP2” (when the item image effect B (IGEP-B) is the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP1”), It is explanatory drawing explaining the display timing of the item image C, the item image D, and the like.

In FIG. 9-12 (B), T2 to T14 are periods during which the item image A of the first display mode (level 1) is displayed. T14 to T15 are execution periods of the fanning effect that incites whether to execute the cut-in notice effect. It should be noted that the cut-in notice effect is not executed after the fanning effect. T4 to T20 are periods during which the item image C of the first display mode (level 1) is displayed. T20 to T21 are execution periods of the fanning effect that incites whether to execute the button notice effect. It should be noted that the button notice effect is not executed after the fanning effect. T5 to T23 are periods during which the item image D of the first display mode (level 1) is displayed. T23 to T24 are execution periods of the fanning effect that incites whether or not to execute the character advance notice effect. It should be noted that the character advance notice effect is not executed after the fanning effect.

In FIG. 9-13 (A), a cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1), a group notice effect (YEP-B), and a button notice effect (YEP-C1) are executed as the advance notice effects, and the item image effect is an item. Each of the image effect A (IGEP-A) and the item image effect B (IGEP-B) is executed by the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP3", and the item image effect C (IGEP-C) is the item image effect execution mode pattern. Display of item image A, item image B, item image C, and item image D when the item image effect D (IGEP-D) is executed by the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP2". It is explanatory drawing explaining the execution timing of the timing, the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1), the group notice effect (YEP-B), the button notice effect (YEP-C1), and the like.

In FIG. 9-13 (A), T14 to T15 are execution periods of the fanning effect that encourages whether to execute the cut-in notice effect. The item image A is erased at T14, but the display mode of the item image A immediately before being erased is the second display mode (level 2). T15 to T16 are execution periods of the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1), that is, a period during which the weak cut-in image 027SHYKE-JCI (see FIG. 9-5 (A)) is displayed. T17 to T18 are execution periods of the fanning effect that incites whether to execute the group notice effect. The item image B is erased at T17, but the display mode of the item image B immediately before being erased is the second display mode (level 2). T18 to T19 are execution periods of the group notice effect (YEP-B), that is, a period during which the group image 027SHYKE-GN (see FIG. 9-5 (C)) is displayed. T20 to T21 are execution periods of the fanning effect that incites whether to execute the button notice effect. The item image C is erased at T20, but the display mode of the item image C immediately before being erased is the third display mode (level 3). In T21 to T22, the execution period of the button notice effect (YEP-C1), that is, the button image 027SHYKE-BU (see FIG. 9-6 (A)) is displayed (push button while the button image 027SHYKE-BU is displayed). When 31B is operated, it is a period in which a weak cut-in image 027SHYKE-JCI (see FIG. 9-6 (B) is displayed) instead of the button image 027SHYKE-BU). T23 to T24 are execution periods of the fanning effect that incites whether or not to execute the character advance notice effect. The item image D is erased in T23, but the display mode of the item image D immediately before being erased is the first display mode (level 1). It should be noted that the character advance notice effect is not executed after the fanning effect.

In FIG. 9-13 (B), the button notice effect (YEP-C2) and the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) are executed as the advance notice effects, and only the item image effect C (IGEP-C) is executed as the item image effect. Is executed in the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP5" (that is, when item image effect A (IGEP-A), item image effect B (IGEP-B) and item image effect D (IGEP-D) are item images. It is explanatory drawing explaining the display timing of the item image C, the execution timing of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D), etc. in the effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP1").

In FIG. 9-13 (B), T4 to T12 are periods during which the item image C of the first display mode (level 1) is displayed. T12 to T20 are periods during which the item image C of the third display mode (level 3) is displayed. T20 to T21 are execution periods of the fanning effect that incites whether to execute the button notice effect. In T21 to T22, the execution period of the button notice effect (YEP-C2), that is, the button image 027SHYKE-BU (see FIG. 9-6 (C)) is displayed (push button while the button image 027SHYKE-BU is displayed). When 31B is operated, it is a period in which the strong cut-in image 027SHYKE-KCI (see FIG. 9-6 (D) is displayed) instead of the button image 027SHYKE-BU). T24 to T25 are execution periods of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D), that is, periods during which the movable body 027SH32 is operated (see FIGS. 9-6 (E) to 9-6 (G)). In the example of FIG. 9-13 (B), there is no display of the item image D suggesting whether or not the character advance notice effect is executed, and there is no execution of the fanning effect to incite whether or not the character advance notice effect is executed. The thing notice production (YEP-D) is being executed. Specifically, when the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP1" is determined when the character advance notice effect is executed (see FIG. 9-10 (G)), it is determined whether the character advance notice effect is executed. Neither the display of the suggesting item image D nor the execution of the fanning effect for inciting whether to execute the character advance notice effect is executed, and the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is executed.

9-14 and 9-15 show the effect determination process (effect determination process for determining the advance notice effect, item image effect, etc.) executed in the variable display start setting process of S171 in the effect control process process shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example. The flowchart of FIG. 9-15 is a continuation of the flowchart of FIG. 9-14.

In the effect determination process shown in FIGS. 9-14, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect based on the fluctuation pattern (step 027SHS100). For example, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (A), if the fluctuation pattern is out of super reach (either fluctuation pattern # 13 or # 14), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution is performed at a rate of 40%. However, if the fluctuation pattern is a super reach jackpot (either fluctuation pattern # 17 or # 18), the execution presence is determined at a rate of 50%, and the fluctuation pattern is other than the above (variation patterns # 10, # 11, # 12). , # 15, # 16), the execution presence is determined at a rate of 0%.

Following step 027SHS100, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the cut-in notice effect is determined to be executed (step 027SHS101). If it is determined that the cut-in notice effect is to be executed (step 027SHS101; YES), the process proceeds to step 027SHS102. If it is not determined that the cut-in notice effect is to be executed (step 027SHS101; NO), the process proceeds to step 027SHS105.

Following step 027SHS101 (YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines the type of cut-in advance notice effect (that is, the advance notice effect pattern) based on the fluctuation pattern (step 027SHS102). For example, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (B), if the fluctuation pattern is out of the super reach, the effect control CPU 120 determines the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-A1" at 80%, and the advance notice effect pattern "YEP". -A2 "is determined by 20%. Further, if the fluctuation pattern is a super reach jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 determines the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-A1" at 20% and determines the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-A2" at 80%.

Following step 027SHS102, the effect control CPU 120 sets the advance notice effect pattern (notice effect pattern "YEP-A1" or advance notice effect pattern "YEP-A2") of the cut-in advance notice effect determined in step 027SHS102 (step). 027SHS103).

Following step 027SHS103, the effect control CPU 120 determines an execution mode (item image effect execution mode pattern) of the item image effect A (IGEP-A) as a case of executing the cut-in notice effect (step 027SHS104). For example, as shown in FIG. 9-10 (A), the effect control CPU 120 has 0% of the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP1", 20% of the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP2", and the item image effect execution. The aspect pattern "IGEGP3" is determined at a ratio of 30%, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" is determined at a ratio of 50%, and the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP5" is determined at a ratio of 0%.

Following step 027SHS101 (NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution mode (item image effect execution mode pattern) of the item image effect A (IGEP-A) as a case where the cut-in notice effect is not executed (step). 027SHS105). For example, as shown in FIG. 9-10 (B), the effect control CPU 120 has 10% of the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP1”, 60% of the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP2”, and the item image effect execution. The aspect pattern "IGEGP3" is determined at a ratio of 20%, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" is determined at a ratio of 10%, and the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP5" is determined at a ratio of 0%.

Following step 027SHS104 or step 027SHS105, the effect control CPU 120 sets the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect A (IGEP-A) determined in step 027SHS104 or step 027SHS105 (step 027SHS106).

Following step 027SHS106, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the group notice effect based on the fluctuation pattern (step 027SHS110). For example, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (C), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect is executed if the fluctuation pattern is out of the super reach, and executes if the fluctuation pattern is the super reach jackpot. Yes is determined at a rate of 50%, and if the fluctuation pattern is other than the above, execution Yes is determined at a rate of 0%.

Following step 027SHS110, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the group advance notice effect is determined to be executed (step 027SHS111). If it is determined that the group notice effect is to be executed (step 027SHS111; YES), the process proceeds to step 027SHS113. If it is not determined that the cut-in notice effect is to be executed (step 027SHS111; NO), the process proceeds to step 027SHS115.

Following step 027SHS111, the effect control CPU 120 sets the advance notice effect pattern “YEP-B” for the group advance notice effect (step 027SHS113).

Following step 027SHS113, the effect control CPU 120 determines an execution mode (item image effect execution mode pattern) of the item image effect B (IGEP-B) as a case of executing the group notice effect (step 027SHS114). For example, as shown in FIG. 9-10 (C), the effect control CPU 120 has 0% of the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP1", 20% of the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP2", and the item image effect execution. The aspect pattern "IGEGP3" is determined at a ratio of 30%, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" is determined at a ratio of 45%, and the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP5" is determined at a ratio of 5%.

Following step 027SHS111 (NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution mode (item image effect execution mode pattern) of the item image effect B (IGEP-B) as a case where the group notice effect is not executed (step 027SHS115). ). For example, as shown in FIG. 9-10 (D), the effect control CPU 120 has 10% of the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP1", 60% of the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP2", and the item image effect execution. The aspect pattern "IGEGP3" is determined at a ratio of 20%, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" is determined at a ratio of 10%, and the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP5" is determined at a ratio of 0%.

Following step 027SHS114 or step 027SHS115, the effect control CPU 120 sets the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B (IGEP-B) determined in step 027SHS114 or step 027SHS115 (step 027SHS116).

Following step 027SHS116, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the button notice effect based on the fluctuation pattern (step 027SHS120). For example, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (D), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect is executed if the fluctuation pattern is out of the super reach, and executes if the fluctuation pattern is the super reach jackpot. Yes is determined at a rate of 50%, and if the fluctuation pattern is other than the above, execution Yes is determined at a rate of 0%.

Following step 027SHS120, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined that the button advance effect is executed (step 027SHS121). If it is determined that the button notice effect is to be executed (step 027SHS121; YES), the process proceeds to step 027SHS122. If it is not determined that the button notice effect is to be executed (step 027SHS121; NO), the process proceeds to step 027SHS125.

Following step 027SHS121 (YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines the type of button advance notice effect (that is, the advance notice effect pattern) based on the fluctuation pattern (step 027SHS122). For example, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (E), if the fluctuation pattern is out of the super reach, the effect control CPU 120 determines the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-C1" at 90%, and the advance notice effect pattern "YEP". -C2 "is determined by 10%. Further, if the fluctuation pattern is a super reach jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 determines the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-C1" at 10% and determines the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-C2" at 90%.

Following step 027SHS122, the effect control CPU 120 sets the advance notice effect pattern (notice effect pattern "YEP-C1" or advance notice effect pattern "YEP-C2") of the button advance notice effect determined in step 027SHS122 (step 027SHS123). ).

Following step 027SHS123, the effect control CPU 120 determines an execution mode (item image effect execution mode pattern) of the item image effect C (IGEP-C) as a case of executing the button notice effect (step 027SHS124). For example, as shown in FIG. 9-10 (E), the effect control CPU 120 has 5% of the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP1”, 10% of the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP2”, and the item image effect execution. The aspect pattern "IGEGP3" is determined at a ratio of 15%, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" is determined at a ratio of 60%, and the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP5" is determined at a ratio of 10%.

Following step 027SHS121 (NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution mode (item image effect execution mode pattern) of the item image effect C (IGEP-C) as a case where the button advance notice effect is not executed (step 027SHS125). ). For example, as shown in FIG. 9-10 (F), the effect control CPU 120 has 20% of the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP1”, 65% of the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP2”, and the item image effect execution. The aspect pattern "IGEGP3" is determined at a ratio of 10%, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" is determined at a ratio of 5%, and the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP5" is determined at a ratio of 0%.

Following step 027SHS124 or step 027SHS125, the effect control CPU 120 sets the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C (IGEP-C) determined in step 027SHS124 or step 027SHS125 (step 027SHS126).

Following step 027SHS126, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the character advance notice effect based on the fluctuation pattern (step 027SHS130). For example, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (F), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute if the fluctuation pattern is out of super reach at a rate of 5%, and executes if the fluctuation pattern is a super reach jackpot. Yes is determined at a rate of 75%, and if the fluctuation pattern is other than the above, execution Yes is determined at a rate of 0%.

Following step 027SHS130, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined that the character advance notice effect is to be executed (step 027SHS131). If it is determined that the character advance notice effect is to be executed (step 027SHS131; YES), the process proceeds to step 027SHS133. If it is not determined that the character advance notice effect is to be executed (step 027SHS131; NO), the process proceeds to step 027SHS135.

Following step 027SHS131, the effect control CPU 120 sets the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-D" of the accessory advance notice effect (step 027SHS133).

Following step 027SHS133, the effect control CPU 120 determines an execution mode (item image effect execution mode pattern) of the item image effect D (IGEP-D) as a case of executing the character advance notice effect (step 027SHS134). For example, as shown in FIG. 9-10 (G), the effect control CPU 120 has 10% of the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP1”, 5% of the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP2”, and the item image effect execution. The aspect pattern "IGEGP3" is determined at a ratio of 15%, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" is determined at a ratio of 60%, and the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP5" is determined at a ratio of 10%.

Following step 027SHS131 (NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution mode (item image effect execution mode pattern) of the item image effect D (IGEP-D) as a case where the character advance notice effect is not executed (step). 027SHS135). For example, as shown in FIG. 9-10 (H), the effect control CPU 120 has 20% of the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP1”, 74% of the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP2”, and the item image effect execution. The aspect pattern "IGEGP3" is determined at a ratio of 4%, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" is determined at a ratio of 2%, and the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP5" is determined at a ratio of 0%.

Following step 027SHS134 or step 027SHS135, the effect control CPU 120 sets the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B (IGEP-D) determined in step 027SHS134 or step 027SHS135 (step 027SHS136). Then, this flowchart ends.

9-16 to 9-20 are diagrams showing an example of an effect operation related to the feature unit 027SH. Specifically, FIGS. 9-16 to 9-20 show the main scenes in the example shown in FIG. 9-12 (A) as an example, and FIG. 9-16 (A) → FIG. 9-16 (B)-> Fig. 9-16 (C)-> Fig. 9-17 (A)-> Fig. 9-17 (B)-> Fig. 9-17 (C)-> Fig. 9-18 (A)-> Fig. 9- 18 (B)-> FIG. 9-18 (C)-> FIG. 9-19 (A)-> FIG. 9-19 (B)-> FIG. 9-19 (C)-> FIG. 9-20 (A)-> FIG. 9-20 ( B) → Transition in the order of FIG. 9-20 (C).

FIG. 9-16 (A) is a scene of reaching in the variable display. FIG. 9-16 (B) is a scene developed into super reach (a scene of T1 in FIG. 9-11). FIG. 9-16 (C) is a scene at the beginning of the super reach effect (a scene immediately after T1 in FIG. 9-11).

9-17 (A) shows a scene in which the item image display suggestion effect using the item image display suggestion display 027SHIGA-SHI suggesting whether the item image A is displayed is performed (FIGS. 9-11 and 9). The scene immediately before T2 in -12 (A)). That is, the effect control CPU 120 executes the item image display suggestion effect using the item image display suggestion display 027SHIGA-SHI that suggests whether the item image A is displayed immediately before the display timing (T2) of the item image A. do. The effect control CPU 120 also executes an item image display suggestion effect that suggests whether each item image is displayed immediately before the display timing of another item image such as the item image B.

9-17 (B) shows a scene (FIGS. 9-11 and 9-12) in which the execution of the item image effect A is started (that is, the display of the item image 027SHIGALV1 in the first display mode (level 1) is started). (A) T2 scene).

Regarding the relationship between the item image display suggestion display 027SHIGA-SHI and the item image A that suggests whether the item image A is displayed, the item image A is displayed when the item image display suggestion display 027SHIGA-SHI is displayed. In some cases, the item image A may not be displayed. Further, when the item image display suggestion display 027SHIGA-SHI is displayed, the item image A may be displayed at all times. Further, the item image A may be displayed when the item image display suggestion display 027SHIGA-SHI is not displayed. Further, the item image A may be displayed more easily when the item image display suggestion display 027SHIGA-SHI is displayed than when the item image display suggestion display 027SHIGA-SHI is not displayed. In addition, there are a plurality of types of item image display suggestion display 027SHIGA-SHI, and the ratio of whether or not item image A is displayed depends on which type of item image display suggestion display 027SHIGA-SHI is displayed. It may be different. Item image display suggestion display suggesting whether item image B is displayed The relationship between item image B-SHI and item image B, item image display suggestion display suggesting whether item image C is displayed 027SHIGC-SHI and item image C The same applies to the relationship between the item image display suggestion display 027SHIGD-SHI and the item image D, which suggests whether the item image D is displayed.

FIG. 9-17 (C) shows a scene in which the item image change suggestion effect using the item image change suggestion display 027SHIGA-HEN suggesting whether the display mode of the item image A changes is performed (FIGS. 9-11 and FIG. 9C). FIG. 9-12 (A), a scene immediately before T6). That is, the effect control CPU 120 uses the item image change suggestion display 027SHIGA-HEN to suggest whether the display mode of the item image A changes immediately before the change timing (T6) of the item image A. To execute. The effect control CPU 120 also executes an item image change suggestion effect that suggests whether the display mode of each item image changes immediately before the change timing of another item image such as the item image B.

FIG. 9-18 (A) is a scene (the scene of T6 in FIGS. 9-11 and 9-12 (A)) in which the item image effect A is changed to the second display mode (level 2).

Regarding the relationship between the item image change suggestion display 027SHIGA-HEN and the item image A, which suggests whether the display mode of the item image A changes, when the item image change suggestion display 027SHIGA-HEN is displayed, the item image A There may be a case where the display mode changes and a case where the display mode of the item image A does not change. Further, when the item image change suggestion display 027SHIGA-HEN is displayed, the display mode of the item image A may be changed at any time. Further, the display mode of the item image A may change when the item image change suggestion display 027SHIGA-HEN is not displayed. Further, the display mode of the item image A may be changed more easily when the item image change suggestion display 027SHIGA-HEN is displayed than when the item image change suggestion display 027SHIGA-HEN is not displayed. Further, there are a plurality of types of the item image change suggestion display 027SHIGA-HEN, and whether or not the display mode of the item image A changes depending on which type of the item image change suggestion display 027SHIGA-HEN is displayed. The proportions may be different. Item image change suggestion display 027SHIGC-HEN suggesting whether the display mode of the item image B changes, the relationship between the item image B and the item image B, and the item image change suggestion display 027SHIGC-HEN suggesting whether the display mode of the item image C changes. The same applies to the relationship between the item image C and the item image C, and the relationship between the item image change suggestion display 027SHIGD-HEN and the item image D, which suggests whether the display mode of the item image D changes.

9-18 (B) shows the item image change suggestion display 027SHIGA-HEN, which suggests whether the display mode of the item image A changes, as in the scene of FIG. 9-17 (C). Is the scene (the scene immediately before T10 in FIGS. 9-11 and 9-12 (A)). 9-18 (C) is a scene in which the item image effect A is changed to the third display mode (level 3) (the scene of T10 in FIGS. 9-11 and 9-12 (A)).

FIG. 9-19 (A) shows that a fanning effect is executed (started) to incite whether to execute the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1, YEP-A2) which is a notice effect corresponding to the item image A. This is a scene in which the fanning effect start display 027SHIGA-KAI is displayed (the scene immediately before T14 in FIGS. 9-11 and 9-12 (A)). That is, the effect control CPU 120 displays the fanning effect start display 027SHIGA-KAI immediately before the execution start timing (T14) of the fanning effect that fuels whether to execute the cut-in notice effect. It should be noted that the effect control CPU 120 also indicates that each of the fanning effects is executed (started) immediately before the execution start timing of the fanning effect that incites whether to execute another notice effect such as the group notice effect. Display the start display of the fanning effect.

9-19 (B) to 9-20 (B) show a scene (FIG. 9) in which a fanning effect 027SHIGA-AO is performed to encourage whether to execute a cut-in notice effect, which is a notice effect corresponding to the item image A (FIG. 9). 9-11 and T14 to T15 in FIG. 9-12 (A)). In the examples of FIGS. 9-19 (B) to 9-20 (B), the countdown fanning display 027SHIGA-AO that counts down to the execution start timing (T14) of the cut-in notice effect is performed. That is, the effect control CPU 120 executes a fanning effect that encourages whether to execute the cut-in notice effect immediately before the execution start timing (T14) of the cut-in notice effect. It should be noted that the effect control CPU 120 also executes a fanning effect that encourages whether or not to execute each advance notice effect immediately before the execution start timing of other advance notice effects such as the group advance notice effect.

FIG. 9-20 (C) shows a scene in which the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1), which is a notice effect corresponding to the item image A, is performed, that is, a scene in which the weak cut-in image 027SHYKE-JCI is displayed. (Scene of T15 to T16 of FIGS. 9-11 and 9-12 (A)).

In addition, there are a fanning effect start display 027SHIGA-KAI indicating that a fanning effect is executed to indicate whether to execute a cut-in notice effect which is a notice effect corresponding to the item image A, and a notice effect corresponding to the item image A. Regarding the relationship with the fanning effect that determines whether to execute the cut-in notice effect, even if the fanning effect start display 027SHIGA-KAI is displayed, the fanning effect may or may not be executed. good. Further, when the fanning effect start display 027SHIGA-KAI is displayed, the fanning effect may always be executed. Further, the fanning effect may be executed when the fanning effect start display 027SHIGA-KAI is not displayed. Further, it may be easier to execute the fanning effect when the fanning effect start display 027SHIGA-KAI is displayed than when the fanning effect start display 027SHIGA-KAI is not displayed. In addition, there are a plurality of types of the fanning effect start display 027SHIGA-KAI, and the ratio of whether or not to execute the fanning effect is different depending on which type of the fanning effect start display 027SHIGA-KAI is displayed. May be good. The fanning effect start display 027SHIGB-KAI indicating that the fanning effect that incites whether to execute the group notice effect, which is the advance notice effect corresponding to the item image B, and the group notice effect, which is the advance notice effect corresponding to the item image B, are executed. The relationship with the fanning effect that incites whether to execute, the button that is the advance notice effect corresponding to the item image C. The relationship with the fanning effect that incites whether to execute the button advancement effect, which is the advance notice effect corresponding to the image C, and the instigation effect that incites whether to execute the character advance notice effect, which is the advance notice effect corresponding to the item image D, is executed. The same applies to the relationship between the fanning effect start display 027SHIGD-KAI indicating that the item image D and the fanning effect for inciting whether to execute the character advance notice effect which is the advance notice effect corresponding to the item image D.

In addition, regarding the relationship between the cut-in notice effect, which is the notice effect corresponding to the item image A, and the cut-in notice effect, which is the notice effect corresponding to the item image A, the fan effect was executed. In some cases, the cut-in notice effect may be executed and the cut-in notice effect may not be executed (see FIG. 9-12 (B)). In addition, the cut-in notice effect may be executed whenever the fanning effect is executed. In addition, the cut-in notice effect may be executed when the fanning effect is not executed. In addition, it may be easier to execute the cut-in notice effect when the fanning effect is executed than when the fanning effect is not executed. Further, there are a plurality of types of fanning effects, and the ratio of whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect may be different depending on which type of fanning effect is executed. The relationship between the fanning effect that encourages whether to execute the group advance notice effect that corresponds to the item image B and the group advance notice effect that corresponds to the item image B, and the advance notice effect that corresponds to the item image C. The relationship between the fanning effect that incites whether to execute the button advance notice effect and the button advance notice effect that is the advance notice effect corresponding to the item image C, and whether to execute the character advance notice effect that is the advance notice effect corresponding to the item image D. The same applies to the relationship between the fanning effect and the character advance notice effect, which is the advance notice effect corresponding to the item image D.

9-21 to 9-30 are diagrams showing an example of an effect operation related to the feature unit 027SH. Specifically, FIGS. 9-21 to 9-30 show the main scenes in the example shown in FIG. 9-13 (A) as an example, and FIG. 9-21 (A) → FIG. 9-21 (B)-> FIG. 9-21 (C)-> FIG. 9-22 (A)-> FIG. 9-22 (B)-> FIG. 9-22 (C)-> FIG. 9-23 (A)-> FIG. 9- 23 (B)-> FIG. 9-23 (C)->, ..., FIG. 9-29 (A)-> FIG. 9-29 (B)-> FIG. 9-29 (C)-> FIG. 9-30 (A)-> FIG. The transition is in the order of -30 (B) → FIG. 9-30 (C).

FIG. 9-21 (A) shows a scene in which the item image display suggestion effect using the item image display suggestion display 027SHIGA-SHI suggesting whether the item image A is displayed is being performed (FIG. 9-11, T2). The scene just before). FIG. 9-21 (B) shows a scene in which the execution of the item image effect A is started (that is, the display of the item image 027SHIGALV1 in the first display mode (level 1) is started) (the scene of T2 in FIG. 9-11). Is.

FIG. 9-21 (C) shows a scene in which the item image display suggestion effect using the item image display suggestion display 027SHIGB-SHI suggesting whether the item image B is displayed is being performed (FIG. 9-11, T3). The scene just before). 9-22 (A) shows a scene in which the execution of the item image effect B is started (that is, the display of the item image 027SHIGBLV1 in the first display mode (level 1) is started) (the scene of T3 in FIG. 9-11). Is.

FIG. 9-22 (B) shows a scene in which the item image display suggestion effect using the item image display suggestion display 027SHIGC-SHI suggesting whether the item image C is displayed is being performed (FIG. 9-11, T4). The scene just before). 9-22 (C) shows a scene in which the execution of the item image effect C is started (that is, the display of the item image 027SHIGCLV1 in the first display mode (level 1) is started) (the scene of T4 in FIG. 9-11). Is.

FIG. 9-23 (A) shows a scene in which the item image display suggestion effect using the item image display suggestion display 027SHIGD-SHI suggesting whether the item image D is displayed is being performed (FIG. 9-11, T5). The scene just before). 9-23 (B) shows a scene in which the execution of the item image effect D is started (that is, the display of the item image 027SHIGDLV1 in the first display mode (level 1) is started) (the scene of T5 in FIG. 9-11). Is.

FIG. 9-23 (C) shows a scene in which the item image change suggestion effect using the item image change suggestion display 027SHIGA-HEN suggesting whether the display mode of the item image A changes is performed (FIG. 9-11). The scene just before T6). FIG. 9-24 (A) is a scene (the scene of T6 in FIG. 9-11) in which the item image effect A is changed to the second display mode (level 2).

FIG. 9-24 (B) shows a scene in which the item image change suggestion effect using the item image change suggestion display 027SHIGB-HEN suggesting whether the display mode of the item image B changes is performed (FIG. 9-11). The scene just before T7). FIG. 9-24 (C) is a scene (the scene of T7 in FIG. 9-11) in which the item image effect B is changed to the second display mode (level 2).

FIG. 9-25 (A) shows a scene in which the item image change suggestion effect using the item image change suggestion display 027SHIGC-HEN suggesting whether the display mode of the item image C changes is performed (FIG. 9-11). The scene just before T8). FIG. 9-25 (B) is a scene (the scene of T8 in FIG. 9-11) in which the item image effect C is changed to the second display mode (level 2).

FIG. 9-25 (C) shows a scene in which the item image change suggestion effect using the item image change suggestion display 027SHIGD-HEN suggesting whether the display mode of the item image D changes is performed (FIG. 9-11). The scene just before T9). 9-26 (A) is a scene (the scene of T9 in FIG. 9-11) in which the item image effect D did not change.

FIG. 9-26 (B) shows a scene in which the item image change suggestion effect using the item image change suggestion display 027SHIGD-HEN suggesting whether the display mode of the item image D changes is performed (FIG. 9-11). The scene just before T13). 9-26 (C) is a scene in which the item image effect D does not change (the scene of T13 in FIG. 9-11). The item image effect C is changed to the third display mode (level 3) in the scene before the scene of 9-26 (C) (the scene of T12 in FIG. 9-11).

FIG. 9-27 (A) shows that the fanning effect for inciting whether to execute the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1, YEP-A2), which is the advance notice effect corresponding to the item image A, is executed (started). This is a scene in which the fanning effect start display 027SHIGA-KAI is displayed (the scene immediately before T14 in FIGS. 9-11 and 9-13 (A)).

9-27 (B) shows a scene (FIGS. 9-11 and 9-13) in which a fanning effect 027SHIGA-AO is performed to encourage whether to execute a cut-in notice effect which is a notice effect corresponding to the item image A. (A) scenes T14 to T15). FIG. 9-27 (C) shows a scene in which the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1), which is a notice effect corresponding to the item image A, is performed, that is, a scene in which the weak cut-in image 027SHYKE-JCI is displayed. (Scene of T15 to T16 of FIGS. 9-11 and 9-13 (A)).

FIG. 9-28 (A) shows a fanning effect start display 027SHIGB indicating that a fanning effect that incites whether to execute the group notice effect (YEP-B), which is a notice effect corresponding to the item image B, is executed (started). -A scene displaying KAI (a scene immediately before T17 in FIGS. 9-11 and 9-13 (A)).

9-28 (B) shows a scene (FIGS. 9-11 and 9-13 (FIGS. 9-11 and 9-13) in which the fanning effect 027SHIGB-AO is performed to incite whether to execute the group warning effect which is the advance notice effect corresponding to the item image B (FIGS. 9-11 and 9-13). A) scenes T17 to T18). 9-28 (C) shows a scene in which a group notice effect, which is a notice effect corresponding to the item image B, is performed, that is, a scene in which the group image 027SHYKE-GN is displayed (FIGS. 9-11 and 9). -13 (A), scenes T18 to T19).

FIG. 9-29 (A) shows that the fanning effect for inciting whether to execute the button notice effect (YEP-C1, YEP-C2), which is the notice effect corresponding to the item image C, is executed (started). This is a scene in which the effect start display 027SHIGC-KAI is displayed (the scene immediately before T20 in FIGS. 9-11 and 9-13 (A)).

9-29 (B) shows a scene (FIGS. 9-11 and 9-13 (FIGS. 9-11) and 9-13 (FIGS. 9-11) and 9-13 (FIGS. 9-11) and 9-13 (FIG. 9-11) and FIG. A) scenes from T20 to T21). 9-29 (C) to 9-30 (A) show a scene in which the button advance notice effect (YEP-C1), which is the advance notice effect corresponding to the item image C, is performed, that is, the button image 027SHYKE-BU. It is a scene (the scenes of T21 to T22 of FIGS. 9-11 and 9-13 (A)) which are displayed and a weak cut-in image 027SHYKE-JCI is displayed as an example after the operation of the push button 31B.

FIG. 9-30 (B) shows a fanning effect start display indicating that a fanning effect is executed (started), which indicates whether to execute the character advance notice effect (YEP-D), which is a notice effect corresponding to the item image D. This is a scene displaying 027SHIGD-KAI (a scene immediately before T23 in FIGS. 9-11 and 9-13 (A)).

FIG. 9-30 (C) shows a scene (FIGS. 9-11 and 9-13) in which a fanning effect 027SHIGD-AO is performed to incite whether or not to execute a character advance notice effect which is a notice effect corresponding to the item image D (FIGS. 9-11 and 9-13). (A) scenes T23 to T24). It should be noted that, after the fanning effect, the character advance notice effect, which is the advance notice effect corresponding to the item image D, is not performed (see FIG. 9-13 (A)).

In the examples of FIGS. 9-16 to 9-30, each item image display suggestion display (027SHIGA-SHI, 027SHIGB-SHI, 027SHIGC-SHI, 027SHIGD-SHI) that suggests the display of each item image is common. However, it may be different for each item image. In addition, although each of the fanning effects (027SHIGA-AO, 027SHIGB-AO, 027SHIGC-AO, 027SHIGD-AO) that fuels each notice production is common, it is different for each notice effect (that is, for each item image). May be good. The fanning effect start display (027SHIGA-KAI, 027SHIGB-KAI, 027SHIGC-KAI, 027SHIGD-KAI) indicating the start of each fanning effect corresponding to each notice effect is common, but any of the noticed effect is displayed. It may be different depending on whether it starts (that is, for each item image).

(Suggested setting value)
Subsequently, the suggestion of the set value (see FIGS. 9-2 (A) and 9-2) will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-31 and 9-32. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH suggests a set value currently set by using the item image effect (for example, using the item image). For example, as shown in FIGS. 9-31 (A) and 9-31 (B), the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH has a fourth display mode as the display mode of the item image D in the item image effect D (B). The display mode of level 4) may be provided to suggest the currently set value in relation to the display of the item image D of the fourth display mode.

(First example)
For example, as shown in FIG. 9-31 (C), there is a transition from the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode to the execution of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) (the movement of the movable body 027SH32 is present). (Any result of hit or miss) may be suggested to indicate that the currently set value is a high setting (for example, a set value of 4 or more).

(Second example)
For example, as shown in FIG. 9-31 (D), it is currently set when the item image D in the fourth display mode is displayed → the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is executed → off. It may be suggested that the set value is a high setting (for example, a set value of 4 or more).

(Third example)
For example, as shown in FIG. 9-31 (E), when the item image D in the fourth display mode is displayed → the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is not executed (the movable body 027SH32 is not operated). (Any result of hit or miss), it may be suggested that the currently set value is set high (for example, set value 4 or more).

(Fourth example)
For example, as shown in FIG. 9-31 (F), when the item image D in the fourth display mode is displayed → the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is not executed → is out of order, the current setting is set. It may be suggested that the set value is a high setting (for example, a set value of 4 or more).

(Fifth example)
Further, although not shown, it is currently set when the item image D in the fourth display mode is displayed → off (regardless of whether or not the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is executed). It may be suggested that the set value is a high setting (for example, a set value of 4 or more).
(Display timing of the fourth display mode (level 4))

In the first example (each of the second to fourth examples may be the same), the display timing of the item image D in the fourth display mode is not particularly limited (that is, it is displayed from the beginning). It may be displayed differently from other display modes), but as an example, the display period may be lengthened so as to be easily recognized by the player. Specifically, as shown as the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP6" in FIG. 9-32 (A), the item image D of the fourth display mode is displayed from the first (T5 in FIG. 9-11). You may. In FIG. 9-32 (A), the fourth display mode is generally gold to make the player recognize that the hit is fixed or rich, but the fourth display mode is out of alignment after the item image D in the fourth display mode is displayed. When the possibility of becoming non-zero (for example, in the case of the second example or the like), the fourth display mode may be a color or pattern different from gold.

(An example of the determination ratio of the first example)
In the case of the first example, as the determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D (IGEP-D) in the case of executing the character advance notice effect (YEP-D), FIG. 9-10 ( Instead of the determination ratio shown in G), the determination ratio as shown in FIG. 9-32 (B) is used, and the item image effect D (IGEP-D) when the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is not executed is used. ), As the determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern, the determination ratio as shown in FIG. 9-32 (C) may be used instead of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 9-10 (H). That is, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the process of step 027SHS134 of FIG. 9-15, the item image effect execution mode pattern is determined at the ratio shown in FIG. 9-32 (B), and the step of FIG. 9-15. In 027SHS135, the item image effect execution mode pattern may be determined at the ratio shown in FIG. 9-32 (C).

That is, there is no case where the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode → the execution of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is not performed (see FIG. 9-32 (C)), but the item image in the fourth display mode. There is a case where the display of D → the execution of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is performed (the movable body 027SH32 is operated) (see FIG. 9-32 (B)), and the item image of the fourth display mode. There is a setting difference in the transition from the display of D to the execution of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) (see FIG. 9-32 (B)). In the example shown in FIG. 9-32 (B), the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP6" is determined at a rate of 1% when the current set value is any of the set values 1 to 3. If the current set value is any of the set values 4 to 6, it is determined at a rate of 15%.

According to the example shown in FIG. 9-32 (B), it is the case of the set value 1-3 that the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode → the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is executed. There are more cases where the set value is 4-6 than. That is, according to the example shown in FIG. 9-32 (B), the fourth setting is higher (for example, the set value is 4 or more) than the low setting (for example, the set value is 3 or less). The frequency of transition from the display of the item image D in the display mode to the execution of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) increases. Therefore, the transition (or frequent transition) of the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode → the execution of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is high with respect to the currently set value. It suggests that it is a setting (for example, a set value of 4 or more).

In the example shown in FIG. 9-32 (B), even if the super reach A (variation pattern # 13, # 17) is obtained, the super reach B (variation pattern # 14, # 18) is obtained. Even if there is, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP6" can be determined when the character effect is executed (in the case of any of the set values 1 to 3, it is determined at a rate of 1%. If it is any of the set values 4 to 6, it is determined at a rate of 15%), but only when the character effect is executed in the case of Super Reach B, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP6" (The item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP6" may not be determined when the character effect is executed in the case of Super Reach A). That is, in the case of Super Reach B, there is a setting difference in the transition from the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode to the execution of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) (the operation of the movable body 027SH32 is present). On the other hand, in the case of Super Reach A, the item image D in the fourth display mode is displayed → the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is executed (the movable body 027SH32 is operated). May be set so that there is no difference in settings.

(An example of the determination ratio of the second example)
In the case of the second example, for example, the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode → the execution of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is possible (the movement of the movable body 027SH32 is present) → the jackpot. There is no setting difference in, but there is a setting difference in the transition of the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode → the execution of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) (with the operation of the movable body 027SH32) → off. There may be. For example, the determination ratio of the item image production execution mode pattern "IGEGP6" when the character effect is executed in the case of a super reach jackpot is set to be common to the set values 1 to 6 (for example, 20%), while the super reach is lost. In this case, the determination ratio of the item image production execution mode pattern "IGEGP6" when the character effect is executed may be different between the case of the set value 1 to 3 and the case of the set value 4 to 6 (for example). If it is any of the set values 1 to 3, it may be 1%, and if it is any of the set values 4 to 6, it may be 10%).

In the case of Super Reach B, the item image D in the fourth display mode is displayed → the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is executed (the movable body 027SH32 is operated) → the transition is made. While making the setting difference, in the case of Super Reach A, the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode → the execution of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is possible (the movement of the movable body 027SH32 is present) → is off. There may be no setting difference in the transition of ,.

(An example of the determination ratio of the third example)
In the case of the third example, for example, there is no setting difference in the transition from the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode to the execution of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D), but the fourth example. There may be a setting difference in the transition from the display of the item image D in the display mode to the non-execution of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D). For example, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP6" is set to be common to the set values 1 to 6 (for example, 10%) when the character effect is executed, while the item image effect is not executed when the character effect is not executed. The determination ratio of the execution mode pattern "IGEGP6" may be different between the case of the set values 1 to 3 and the case of the set values 4 to 6 (for example, when any of the set values 1 to 3 is set, 0. If it is 5% or any of the set values 4 to 6, it may be 3%).

(An example of the determination ratio of the fourth example)
In the case of the fourth example, for example, there is no setting difference in the transition of the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode → no execution of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) → big hit. There may be a setting difference in the transition of the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode → no execution of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) → off. For example, the determination ratio of the item image production execution mode pattern "IGEGP6" when the character effect is not executed in the super reach jackpot (variation patterns # 17 and # 18) is set to be common to the set values 1 to 6 (for example, 5%). , When the item image production execution mode pattern "IGEGP6" is determined when the character effect is not executed in the out-of-super reach (variation patterns # 13 and # 14), the determination ratios are set values 1 to 3 and set values 4 to 6. (For example, 0.5% may be set when any of the set values 1 to 3 is set, and 3% may be set when any of the set values 4 to 6 is used).

(An example of the determination ratio of the fifth example)
In the case of the fifth example, the details are omitted, but for example, there is no setting difference in the transition from the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode to the jackpot, but the item image in the fourth display mode. There may be a setting difference in the transition of D display → off.

In the above description, an example suggesting that the currently set value is set to a high setting (for example, a set value of 4 or more) has been described, but the target of the suggestion is not limited to the high setting. For example, the negation of the minimum setting (setting value 1) (setting value 2 or more) may be suggested, or each setting value of the setting value 1 to the setting value 6 may be suggested. That is, in the above, an example in which the determination ratios of the item image effect execution mode patterns are divided into two, the set values 1 to 3 and the set values 4 to 6, has been described. For example, the set value 1 and the set value 2 have been described. The item image effect execution mode pattern may be determined differently by dividing into 6 and the item image effect execution mode pattern may be determined by dividing each of the set values 1 to 6 into 6 items. May be different.

(Regarding a modified example of a gaming machine related to the feature unit 027SH)
Subsequently, a modification of FIGS. 9-1 to 9-32 will be described.

(Modification example 1 of the feature portion 027SH)
In the above, an example has been described in which the order of the display start timing of each item image and the order of the execution start timing of each notice effect corresponding to each item image match. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 9-11 and the like, the display start timing of the item images A to D is the display start timing of the item image A (T2) → the display start timing of the item image B (T3) → the item image. The display start timing of C (T4) → the display start timing of the item image D (T5), and the execution start timing of each notice effect corresponding to the item images A to D is the cut-in corresponding to the item image A. Execution start timing of the advance notice effect (T15) → Execution start timing of the group advance notice effect corresponding to the item image B (T18) → Execution start timing of the button advance notice effect corresponding to the item image C (T21) → Correspond to the item image D The order is the execution start timing of the character notice effect, and the order of the display start timing of each item image and the order of the execution start timing of each notice effect corresponding to each item image match. ing. However, the order of the display start timing of each item image and the order of the execution start timing of each notice effect corresponding to each item image do not have to match. For example, the item image A → the item image B may be displayed in this order, and the group notice effect corresponding to the item image B → the cut-in notice effect corresponding to the item image A may be executed in this order. Further, when the item image A → the item image B are displayed in this order, the cut-in notice effect → the group notice effect may be executed in the order, or the group notice effect → the cut-in notice effect may be executed in the order. You may do so.

(Modification example 2 of the feature portion 027SH)
In the above, an example in which the display start timing of each item image is different is described. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 9-11 and the like, the item image A is T1, the item image B is T2, the item image C is T3, and the item image D is T4. However, the display start timing of each item image does not have to be different individually. For example, two types of display start timings of the four types of item images A to D may be displayed at the same time, or three types of the four types of item images may be displayed at the same time. Alternatively, the display start timings of all the four types of item images may be simultaneous.

(Modification example 3 of the feature portion 027SH)
In the above, an example in which the change timing of each item image to the second display mode (level 2) is different is described. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 9-11 and the like, the item image A is T6, the item image B is T7, the item image C is T8, and the item image D is T9. However, the timing of changing each item image to the second display mode (level 2) does not have to be different individually. For example, the timing of changing to the second display mode (level 2) of two types of the four types of item images A to D may be simultaneous, or three types of the four types of item images. The timing of changing to the second display mode (level 2) may be the same, or the timing of changing all four types of item images to the second display mode (level 2) may be simultaneous. The same applies to the timing of change to the third display mode (level 3).

(Modification example 4 of feature portion 027SH)
In the example shown in FIGS. 9-11 and the like, the display mode at the start of displaying the item image A is always the first display mode (level 1), but the display mode at the time of display disclosure is the second display mode (level 1). 2) or the third display mode (level 3) may be used. The same applies to the item image B, the item image C, and the item image D. As described above, when the item image D may be in the fourth display mode (level 4), the display mode at the time of display disclosure may be the fourth display mode (level 4).

(Variation example 5 of the feature portion 027SH)
In the above, an example in which the display mode of the item image does not change at the timing after any of the notice effects is executed (that is, at the change timing when the display mode of the item image changes, any of the notice effects is executed. An example) that is earlier than the above was explained. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 9-11, none of the item images changes at the timing after the earliest executed cut-in notice effect is executed (after T15). However, the display mode of the item image may be changed at the timing after any of the advance notice effects is executed.

(Variation example 6 of the feature portion 027SH)
In the above, an example in which the item image is not newly displayed at the timing after one of the notice effects is executed (that is, the display start timing of the item image is earlier than the timing when any of the notice effects is executed). Example) was explained. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 9-11, no item image is newly displayed at the timing after the earliest executed cut-in notice effect is executed (after T15). However, the item image may be newly displayed at the timing after any of the advance notice effects is executed.

(Modification example 7 of the feature portion 027SH)
In the above, an example in which the execution periods of a certain advance notice effect and another advance notice effect do not overlap has been described, but the execution periods of a certain advance notice effect and another advance notice effect may overlap. That is, when the execution start timing of a certain advance notice effect → the execution start timing of another advance notice effect → the execution end timing of another advance notice effect → the execution end timing of a certain advance notice effect, or the execution start timing of a certain advance notice effect → another The execution start timing of the advance notice effect → the execution end timing of a certain advance notice effect → the execution end timing of another advance notice effect may be set.

(Modification example 8 of the feature portion 027SH)
In the above, the item image and the notice production are one-to-one, such as the item image A and the cut-in notice effect, the item image B and the group notice effect, the item image C and the button notice effect, and the item image D and the character notice effect. An example of correspondence was explained. That is, as shown in FIG. 9-11, it is the cut-in notice effect that can be executed based on the item image A being erased (used as an item), and the item image B is erased. It is a group notice effect that can be executed based on, and it is a button notice effect that can be executed based on the erasure of the item image C, and can be executed based on the erasure of the item image D. Explained that it was a notice production of the character. However, the item image and the advance notice effect do not necessarily have to be in a one-to-one correspondence relationship.

For example, a plurality of notice effects (for example, cut-in notice effect, group notice effect) may be associated with a certain item image (for example, item image X). When the item image X is associated with the cut-in notice effect and the group notice effect, only the cut-in notice effect is executed based on the deletion of the item image X, and the item image X is executed. In some cases, only the group notice effect is executed based on the fact that is deleted. It should be noted that the cut-in notice effect and the group notice effect may be executed based on the erasure of the item image X.

Further, for example, one notice effect (for example, a cut-in notice effect) may be associated with a plurality of item images (for example, item image X and item image Y). When the cut-in notice effect is associated with the item image X and the item image Y, the cut-in notice effect is executed based on the deletion of the item image X, and the item image Y is deleted. The cut-in notice effect may be executed based on the fact. In addition to the display mode of the item image when it is erased, the rate at which the advance notice effect is executed may be different depending on the type of the item image to be erased. In the above example, in addition to the display mode of the item image X and the item image Y when deleted, the cut-in notice effect is executed according to whether the item image X is deleted or the item image Y is deleted. The proportions to be made may be different.

Further, for example, a plurality of notice effects (for example, cut-in notice effect, group notice effect) may be associated with a plurality of item images (for example, item image X and item image Y). When the item image X and the item image Y are associated with the cut-in notice effect and the group notice effect, only the cut-in notice effect is executed based on the deletion of the item image X. , The case where only the group notice effect is executed based on the erasure of the item image X, the case where only the cut-in notice effect is executed based on the erasure of the item image Y, and the case where the item image Y is executed. In some cases, only the group notice effect is executed based on the fact that it is erased. When the cut-in notice effect and the group notice effect are executed based on the erasure of the item image X, or the cut-in notice effect and the group notice effect are executed based on the erasure of the item image Y. It may be executed. In addition to the display mode of the item image when it is erased, the ratio of the advance notice effect to be executed and the ratio of the type of the advance notice effect to be executed may be different depending on the type of the item image to be deleted. good.

(Modification example 9 of the feature portion 027SH)
In the above description, the item image can specify the notice effect having a corresponding relationship at the time of the start of display, but the item image may not be able to specify the notice effect having a corresponding relationship at the time of the start of display. For example, the item image A corresponding to the cut-in notice effect is displayed in a display mode (for example, plain) in which the corresponding notice effect cannot be specified at the display start timing, and the corresponding notice effect is displayed at the change timing. May be changed from an unspecified display mode (for example, plain) to a identifiable display mode (first display mode, second display mode, etc.).

(Modification example 10 of the feature portion 027SH)
In the above, an example in which a plurality of item images of the same type are not displayed has been described, but a plurality of item images of the same type may be displayed. For example, when two item images A of the first display mode (level 1) are displayed side by side, or the item image A of the first display mode (level 1) and the item image A of the second display mode (level 2) are displayed side by side. And may be displayed side by side. When N items of a certain type are displayed, the advance notice effect corresponding to the item images is executed up to N times.

(Modification example 11 of the feature portion 027SH)
In the above, the display mode of the item image changes, but the type of the item image does not change. However, the type of the item image may also change. For example, when the item image A of the first display mode (level 1) changes to the item image B of the first display mode (level 1), or the item image A of the first display mode (level 1) is the second. There may be a case where the item image B of the display mode (level 2) is changed. The display mode is demoted (level 3 → level 2) when the type is changed such that the item image A of the third display mode (level 3) changes to the item image B of the second display mode (level 2). There may be cases.

(Modification example 12 of the feature portion 027SH)
In the above, there are four types of advance notice effects, and there are also four types of item images corresponding to the advance notice effects, but the item images and advance notice effects do not have to be four types. For example, in relation to the above-described modification 8, the item image may be 2 types and the notice effect may be 5 types, the item image may be 5 types, and the notice effect may be 2 types. Further, one type of item image and one type of advance notice effect may be used.

(Modification example 13 of the feature portion 027SH)
In the above, an example has been described in which the timing of erasing the item image is the timing of executing the fanning effect for inciting the advance notice effect corresponding to the item image, but the timing of erasing the item image is not limited to this. For example, the timing for erasing the item image may be the timing at which the advance notice effect corresponding to the item image is executed. That is, the item image may be continuously displayed during the execution period of the fanning effect and deleted at the start of execution of the advance notice effect (at the end of the fanning effect). Specifically, in FIG. 9-11, the item image A is erased to T15 instead of T14, the item image B is erased to T18 instead of T17, and the item image C is erased to T21 instead of T20. The item image D may be deleted in T24 instead of T23.

(Modification example 14 of the feature portion 027SH)
In the above, the item image A is erased at the start of the fanning effect (T14 in FIG. 9-11), and during the execution period of the fanning effect (T14 to T15 in FIG. 9-11) and during the cut-in notice effect (T14 in FIG. 9-11). An example that is not displayed in T15 to T16 of FIGS. 9-11 (in the case of the above-mentioned modified example 13, it is erased at the start of the cut-in notice effect (T15), and is erased during the period of the cut-in notice effect (FIG. 9-11). An example) that is not displayed in T15 to T16) has been described. That is, an example has been described in which the item image A is erased by the start of the cut-in notice effect at the latest and is not displayed during the cut-in notice effect. However, the item image A may be displayed during the cut-in notice effect without being erased. That is, the item image A may not be erased even if it is used. The same applies to other item images (item image B, item image C, item image D).

(Variation example 15 of the feature portion 027SH)
In relation to the above-described modification 14, when the used item image A is not erased, it may be possible to recognize that the used item image A has been used. For example, if the display mode of the item image A immediately before starting the fanning effect for fanning the cut-in notice effect is the second display mode (level 2) (the first display mode (level 1) or the third display mode (level 1)). 3)), at the start of the fanning effect that fuels the cut-in notice effect, the second display mode (level 2) → the fanning effect execution mode (for example, the color is grayed down or monochrome, and the wording "fanning effect is in progress". , Etc.), and at the start of the cut-in notice effect, the fanning effect execution mode → the advance notice effect execution mode (for example, the color is grayed down or monochrome, and the wording “notice effect in progress” etc. is displayed). , At the end of the cut-in advance notice effect, the advance notice effect execution mode → the advance notice effect end mode (for example, the color may be grayed down or monochrome, and the word “finished” or the like may be displayed). That is, regarding the item image A, during the execution period (T14 to T15) of the fanning effect, it is set as the "fanning effect execution mode", and during the execution period of the cut-in notice effect (T15 to T16), it is set as the "notice effect execution mode" and cut. After the end of the in-notice effect (T16 ~), the "notice effect end mode" may be set. The same applies to other item images (item image B, item image C, item image D).

If the cut-in notice effect is not executed after the fanning effect, at the execution start timing of the cut-in notice effect, the fanning effect execution mode → the notice effect non-execution mode (for example, the color is grayed down or monochrome, and the wording "notice" A mode in which "directing non-execution" or the like is displayed) may be used. That is, with respect to the item image A, the "fanning effect execution mode" may be set during the execution period (T14 to T15) of the fanning effect, and the "notice effect non-execution mode" may be set after the end of the fanning effect (T15 to). The same applies to other item images (item image B, item image C, item image D).

The above-mentioned fanning effect execution mode may be common regardless of the type of the item image. For example, it may be plain, and the wording "in the process of fanning" or the like may be displayed. The advance notice effect execution mode, the advance notice effect end mode, and the advance notice effect non-execution mode may be common regardless of the type of the item image.

In addition, instead of the above, the fanning effect execution mode may be one according to the type of the item image. For example, the color may be grayed down or the wording "during the down feathering" or the like may be displayed within a range in which a pattern (see FIG. 9-9) corresponding to the type of the item image can be recognized. The advance notice effect execution mode, the advance notice effect end mode, and the advance notice effect non-execution mode may be common regardless of the type of the item image.

(Modification example 16 of the feature portion 027SH)
In the above, an example of executing the notice effect after executing the fan effect (an example of executing the fan effect before executing the notice effect) has been described, but it is not necessary to execute the notice effect after executing the fan effect (notice effect). You don't have to perform the fanning effect before executing). That is, after the item image is used, the advance notice effect may be executed without executing the fanning effect.

(Modification example 17 of the feature portion 027SH)
In the above, the item image effect (display of the item image) and the notice effect are executed during the super reach effect, but the item image effect and the advance notice effect may be executed during another period. For example, the flow may be variable display start → item image A display start → reach → item image A deletion → cut-in notice effect execution, or variable display start → item image A display start → reach → super reach. → Delete item image A → Execute cut-in notice effect, or start variable display → Reach → Start display item image A → Delete item image A → Execute cut-in notice effect, The flow may be as follows: variable display start → reach → display start of item image A → development into super reach → deletion of item image A → execution of cut-in notice effect.

(Modification example 18 of the feature portion 027SH)
In the above, the item image effect (display of the item image) and the advance notice effect are executed during one variation, but the item image effect and the advance notice effect may be executed over a plurality of variations.

For example, it is necessary to display all the necessary item images (item images for which display is determined) in one fluctuation, and delete all the displayed item images in the other fluctuation after the next fluctuation. It is also possible to execute all of the notice effects (notice effects for which execution is determined). For example, the item image A, the item image B, and the item image C are displayed on the first fluctuation → The item image A, during the fluctuation after some fluctuations (for example, during the fluctuation of any of the second to fourth fluctuations), The flow is that the item image B and the item image C are all erased (each item image can be changed between the start of display and the deletion) and the necessary advance notice effect is executed.

Further, for example, all necessary item images (item images for which display presence is determined) are displayed during a certain fluctuation, and the displayed item images are sequentially deleted over a plurality of fluctuations to produce a necessary notice (a notice effect). The advance notice effect for which execution is determined) may be executed in sequence. For example, it is necessary to start displaying the item image A, the item image B, and the item image C in the first variation and delete the item image A in the first variation (the item image A can be changed between the start of display and the deletion). Execute notice effect (cut-in notice effect) → Delete item image B at the second change (item image B can be changed between display start and erase) and execute necessary notice effect (group notice effect) → 3 changes The flow of erasing the item image C in the eyes (the item image C can be changed between the start of display and erasing) and executing the necessary notice effect (button notice effect), and the item image A and item image B in the first variation. , Start displaying item image C → Erase item image A on the 2nd change (item image A can change between display start and erase) and execute the necessary notice effect (cut-in notice effect) → 3rd change Erase item image B (item image B can be changed between display start and erase) and execute necessary notice effect (group notice effect) → Delete item image C at the 4th change (item image C starts display ~ It is a flow of executing the necessary advance notice effect (button advance notice effect) (which can be changed during erasure).

Further, for example, the required item image (item image for which display presence is determined) is sequentially displayed over a plurality of fluctuations, and the displayed item is being displayed during another fluctuation in which all the necessary item images have been displayed. You may delete all the images and execute all the necessary notice effects (notice effects for which execution is determined). For example, the item image A starts to be displayed on the first variation → the item image B starts to be displayed on the second variation → the item image C starts to be displayed on the third variation, and the item image A, the item image B, and the item appear on the third variation. The flow of erasing all image C (each item image can be changed between display start and erasure) and executing the necessary notice effect, and the item image A is displayed on the first change → the item image on the second change. Start displaying B → Start displaying item image C on the 3rd change → Erase all item image A, item image B, and item image C on the 4th change (each item image can be changed between display start and deletion) The flow is to execute the necessary notice production.

Further, for example, necessary item images (item images for which display presence is determined) are sequentially displayed over a plurality of fluctuations, and the displayed item images are sequentially deleted over a plurality of fluctuations to provide a necessary notice. The production (notice production for which execution is determined) may be sequentially executed. For example, the item image A is started to be displayed on the first change → the item image B is started to be displayed on the second change, and the item image A is deleted on the second change (the item image A can be changed between the start of display and the deletion). The necessary notice effect (cut-in notice effect) is executed, and the item image B is erased at the third variation (the item image B can be changed between the start of display and the deletion), and the necessary notice effect (group notice effect) is performed. The flow of execution, for example, the item image A starts to be displayed on the first variation → the item image B starts to be displayed on the second variation → the item image A is deleted on the third variation (the item image A is between the display start and the deletion). Perform the necessary notice effect (cut-in notice effect) (changeable) and delete the item image B at the 4th variation (item image B can be changed between display start and erase) and the necessary notice effect (group) It is a flow to execute the notice production).

(Variation example 19 of the feature portion 027SH)
In the above, the item image is determined in the variable display start setting process (step S171) (see FIGS. 7 and 9-14), but the item image is determined in the pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). May be good. In the mode of determining the item image in the variable display start setting process (step S171), the item image is determined based on whether or not the advance notice effect is executed and the fluctuation pattern (see FIG. 9-10), but the look-ahead advance notice is made. When the item image is determined in the setting process (step S161), the item image is based on the contents of the received symbol specification command (see FIG. 8-16) and variable category specification command (see FIG. 8-16). You may decide. It should be noted that a plurality of item images may be collectively determined in the pre-reading notice setting process at the time of one start winning, or one item image may be determined in the pre-reading notice setting process at the time of each start winning. .. That is, a plurality of item images may be associated with one variation, or one item image may be associated with each variation.

(Modification example 20 of feature portion 027SH)
In the above, as an effect when using the item image after displaying the item image, an example of executing a notice effect corresponding to the type of the item image to be used has been described, but the notice effect corresponding to the type of the item image to be used has been described. There may be a case where a different kind of advance notice effect is executed. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 9-11, it is the cut-in notice effect that can be executed based on the erasure of the item image A, but the group notice effect is based on the erasure of the item image A. May be executed. Further, as an example related to the modification 8, when a plurality of notice effects (for example, cut-in notice effect, group notice effect) are associated with a certain item image (for example, item image X). , A notice effect (for example, a character advance notice effect) different from the above-mentioned plurality of advance notice effects (for example, cut-in notice effect, group notice effect) may be executed based on the erasure of the item image X. You may. As a result, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and improve the interest. In addition, in a mode in which a different type of advance notice effect from the advance notice effect corresponding to the type of item image to be used may be executed, a different type of advance notice effect from the advance notice effect corresponding to the type of item image to be used is executed. The jackpot expectation may be higher in the case than in the case of executing the advance notice effect corresponding to the type of the item image to be used.

(Modification example 21 of the feature portion 027SH)
Although the suggestion of the set value has been described with reference to FIGS. 9-31 and 9-32, the suggestion of the set value is not limited to this.

For example, in relation to the above-mentioned modification 1, the determination ratio of whether or not to match the order of the display start timing of each item image and the order of the execution start timing of each notice effect corresponding to each item image is set. A setting difference may be provided to suggest a set value in relation to whether the order of the display start timing of the item image and the order of the execution start timing of the advance notice effect match. As an example, the ratio of matching the order of the display start timing of the item image and the order of the execution start timing of the advance notice effect is set to 95% when the setting is low (for example, 3 or less), and is set to high (for example, 4). If it is (or more), it is set to 85%, and the fact that the order of the display start timing of the item image and the order of the execution start timing of the advance notice effect do not match (or often do not match) is a high setting (for example, a set value). It may be suggested that it is 4 or more). In other words, the frequency at which the above-mentioned order-related rules (in principle, the order is the same) is broken is higher at high settings (5% at low settings, 15% at high settings). You may suggest it.

Further, in relation to the above-described modification 2, a setting difference is provided in the determination ratio of whether or not to display the display start timings of the plurality of item images at the same time, and it is related to whether the display start timings of the plurality of item images are at the same time. However, the set value may be suggested. As an example, the ratio of displaying start timings of a plurality of item images at the same time is set to 5% when the setting is low (for example, 3 or less) and 15% when the setting is high (for example, 4 or more). , It may be suggested that the fact that the change timings of the plurality of item images match (or the frequency of matching is high) is a high setting (for example, a set value of 4 or more). In other words, the frequency of breaking the above display start timing rule (the principle is not simultaneous) is higher in the high setting (5% in the low setting, 15% in the high setting), so it is higher due to the breaking of the law (frequency of breaking the rule). It may suggest a setting. Similarly, in relation to the above-mentioned modification 3, a setting difference is provided in the determination ratio of whether or not the change timings of the plurality of item images are simultaneous, and whether the change timings of the plurality of item images are simultaneous. It may be related and suggest a setting value.

Further, in relation to the above-described modification 4, a setting difference is provided in the determination ratio of the display mode at the time of display disclosure of the item image, and the set value is suggested in relation to the display mode at the time of display disclosure of the item image. May be good. As an example, the display mode at the start of displaying the item image is the first display mode (level 1) or the second display mode (level 2), and the ratio of the second display mode (level 2) is set low (for example,). If it is 3 or less), it is set to 3%, if it is set to a high setting (for example, 4 or more), it is set to 9%, and the display mode at the start of displaying the item image is the second display mode (level 2). It may be suggested that (or the frequency of the second display mode (level 2) is high) is a high setting (for example, a set value of 4 or more). In other words, the frequency of breaking the law regarding the display mode when displaying and disclosing the item image (in principle, the first display mode (level 1)) is higher in the high setting (3% in the low setting, 9% in the high setting). High setting may be suggested by the breaking of the law (frequency of breaking the law).

Further, the set value may be suggested in the advance notice effect. For example, for a strong cut-in image (Fig. 9-5 (B), etc.), a normal strong cut-in image (appearance of characters A, B, etc.) and a special strong cut-in image (appearance of characters A, C, etc.) By preparing two types of strong cut-in images and setting a difference in the determination ratio of the types of the strong cut-in images, the set value may be suggested in the strong cut-in image. Specifically, for example, after deciding to execute the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A2) for displaying a strong cut-in image, if the setting is low (for example, 3 or less), "normal strong cut-in image" Is determined at a rate of 95% and "special strong cut-in image" is determined at a rate of 5%. The "strong cut-in image" may be determined at a rate of 20%. That is, in the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A2) for displaying the strong cut-in image, the frequency at which the "special strong cut-in image" is displayed (or the frequency at which the "special strong cut-in image" is displayed is displayed. Many) may suggest a high setting (eg, a set value of 4 or more).

Further, for example, for a group image (FIG. 9-5 (C), etc.), two types of group images, a normal group image (character A group) and a special group image (character B group), are prepared, and the group image is prepared. By providing a setting difference in the determination ratio of the type of, the set value may be suggested in the group image. Specifically, for example, after deciding to execute the group notice effect (YEP-B), when the setting is low (for example, 3 or less), 95% of the "normal group image" and the "special group image" are used. Is determined at a rate of 5%, and if the setting is high (for example, 4 or more), the "normal group image" may be determined at a rate of 80%, and the "special group image" may be determined at a rate of 20%. good. That is, in the group notice effect (YEP-B) for displaying the group image, it is set high that the "special group image" is displayed (or the "special group image" is frequently displayed). It may be suggested that the value is (for example, a set value of 4 or more).

Further, the set value may be suggested in the super reach. For example, for Super Reach B (variable patterns # 16 and # 18), there are two types of super reach effects: a normal super reach effect (battle effect in background 1) and a special super reach effect (battle effect in background 2). By preparing a setting difference in the determination ratio of the type of super reach effect of super reach B, the set value may be suggested in the super reach effect of super reach B. It may also suggest a set value in relation to the jackpot. For example, for the start production (fanfare production) of the jackpot game state of the third jackpot (see Fig. 9-2), two types of fanfare productions, a normal fanfare production and a special fanfare production, are prepared, and the fanfare production in the third jackpot By providing a setting difference in the determination ratio of the type of, the set value may be suggested in the fanfare effect in the third big hit.

Further, it may be suggested by the item image that the setting value is suggested later. For example, the item image may suggest that the set value is suggested in the advance notice effect. As an example, when it is decided to display a "special strong cut-in image" in which a setting value is suggested, and a cut-in notice effect is performed, the setting value is suggested in the cut-in notice effect. The item image A may be displayed in a mode suggesting that the above is performed (for example, a mode in which the wording "notice with setting suggestion?" Is displayed). That is, in the item image A of the above aspect, it is uncertain whether or not the cut-in notice effect is performed, but if the cut-in notice effect is performed, the "special strong cut-in image" is used in the cut-in notice effect. Is suggested to be displayed. As another example, when it is decided to display a "special strong cut-in image" in which the setting value is suggested, the mode suggesting that the setting value is suggested in the cut-in notice effect ( For example, the item image A may be displayed (a mode in which the wording "notice with setting suggestion!" Is displayed). That is, the item image A of the above aspect suggests that the cut-in notice effect is performed and that the "special strong cut-in image" is displayed in the cut-in notice effect.

It should be noted that the advance notice effect shown in FIG. 9-4 has a set value in a different effect (may be an effect related to the jackpot reliability, or may be an effect not related to the jackpot reliability). The item image may suggest that the suggestion is made.

Further, it may be suggested by a method other than the item image that the setting value is suggested later. In other words, the item image may not suggest that the set value is suggested later. For example, it may be suggested that the setting value is suggested in the advance notice effect by the fanning effect of the advance notice effect. As an example, when it is decided to display a "special strong cut-in image" in which a setting value is suggested, and a cut-in notice effect is performed, the setting value is suggested in the cut-in notice effect. (For example, a mode in which a word such as "notice with setting suggestion?" Is displayed in the vicinity of the number to be counted down) may be executed. That is, it is uncertain whether or not the cut-in notice effect will be performed in the fanning effect of the above aspect, but if the cut-in notice effect is performed, the "special strong cut-in image" in the cut-in notice effect. Is suggested to display. As another example, when it is decided to display a "special strong cut-in image" in which the setting value is suggested, the mode suggesting that the setting value is suggested in the cut-in notice effect ( For example, a fanning effect of (a mode in which a word such as "notice with setting suggestion!" Is displayed near the number to be counted down) may be executed. That is, the fanning effect of the above aspect suggests that the cut-in notice effect is performed and that the "special strong cut-in image" is displayed in the cut-in notice effect.

It should be noted that the suggestion of the set value may not be suggested at all later. That is, the set value may be suggested without any suggestion in advance (without suggesting even the item image or suggesting other than the item image.

In addition, "suggestion of setting value" is only to recognize that there is a high possibility that it is a certain setting value (or a setting value within a certain range), and that it is a certain setting value (or a setting value within a certain range). It may not be deterministically notified, or it may be deterministically notified that it is a certain set value (or a set value within a certain range). For example, by making sure that a certain effect or a certain display is not determined when the setting is low (for example, a setting value of 3 or less), the effect or the display or the like is set to a high setting (for example, a setting value of 4 or less). It will definitely notify you of the fact.

(Application to other devices)
In the above, an example of applying to a pachinko gaming machine has been described, but it can also be applied to a slot machine. For example, in a certain state (for example, a state that is not an advantageous state), whether to shift to another state (for example, an advantageous state) periodically (for each fixed number of games, for each number of games within a predetermined range) is determined from the normal time. In a slot machine that draws with a high probability, it is possible to execute multiple types of advance notice effects with different expectations for transition to another state during the period of high probability that it visits periodically, and from the period of high probability. In the previous period, after making it possible to display an item image that can specify the type of advance notice effect to be executed, the type specified by the item image after the item image is displayed depending on the display mode of the item image. The rate at which the advance notice effect is executed may be different.

Alternatively, in the slot machine that draws with high probability whether to shift to the second advantageous state (for example, AT state, ART state, etc.) in the first advantageous state (for example, CZ, bonus game, etc.), the first In the second period of the advantageous state (for example, the period from the latter half to the final stage of the period of the first advantageous state), it is possible to execute a plurality of types of advance notice effects having different expectations for transition to the second advantageous state. In the first period prior to the second period of the first advantageous state, it is possible to display an item image that can specify the type of the advance notice effect to be executed, and then the item image is displayed according to the display mode. After the item image is displayed, the rate at which the advance notice effect of the type specified by the item image is executed may be different.

(Explanation of Means Concerning Feature 027SH)
(Means 1 relating to feature unit 027SH)
A gaming machine capable of performing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, a slot machine, etc.) and provided with an effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120, etc.) capable of executing an effect. , Multiple types of notice within a predetermined period (for example, T15 to T16, T18 to T19, T21 to T22, T24 to T25 shown in FIG. 9-11, a period before the period in which the lottery is performed with high probability, etc.) A specific display (for example, FIGS. 9-9 (A) to 9-9 (A)) to be able to execute the effect (for example, a plurality of types of advance notice effects shown in FIG. It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, the item image effect shown in FIG. 9-8 (A)) in which a plurality of types of item images shown in (L) are displayed before the predetermined period. The rate at which the content advantageous to the player is notified differs depending on the type of the advance notice effect executed within the predetermined period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-7 (A) to (F), the jackpot expectation degree is different. (Different), there are cases where the advance notice effect of the type specified by the specific display is executed after the specific display is displayed, and cases where it is not executed (for example, FIGS. 9-10 (A) (C)). (E) When the item image effect execution mode patterns "IGEGP2" to "IGEGP5" for displaying the item image are determined when the advance notice effect of (G) is executed, the item image is specified by the item image after the item image is displayed. Item image effect execution mode patterns "IGEGP2" to "IGEGP5" that display an item image when the advance notice effects of the above types are executed and the advance notice effects shown in FIGS. 9-10 (B), (D), (F), and (H) are not executed. When the item image is displayed, the type of advance notice effect specified by the item image is not executed), and there are a plurality of display modes of the specific display (for example, FIGS. 9-9 (A) to (A) to ( (L)), the rate at which the notice effect corresponding to the specific display is executed after the specific display is displayed differs depending on the display mode of the specific display (for example, FIGS. 9-8 (B), 9). As shown in -10 (A) to -10 (H), the rate at which the notice effect corresponding to the item image is executed after the item image is displayed differs depending on the display mode of the item image. Specifically, the notice. The rate at which the effect is executed is such that the display mode of the item image corresponding to the notice effect is the third display mode (level 3)> the display mode of the item image corresponding to the notice effect is the second display mode (level 2)>. The forecast The display mode of the item image corresponding to the notification effect is the first display mode (level 1)).

According to the above-mentioned gaming machine, since the ratio of the advance notice effect corresponding to the specific display being executed differs depending on the display mode of the specific display, the player pays attention to the display mode of the specific display. The interest of the game is improved.

(Means 2 pertaining to feature unit 027SH)
In the gaming machine of the above means 1, the specific display changes to a special mode corresponding to the execution period of the advance notice effect (for example, the type of advance notice effect specified by the specific display) corresponding to the specific display. It is possible (for example, the item image A can be changed to the "notice effect execution mode" at the time of executing the cut-in notice effect (T15)), and the special aspect of the specific display is not limited to the type of the specific display. (For example, it may be common regardless of the type of item image).

According to the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is possible to clearly notify that the advance notice effect corresponding to the specific display is being executed (the item image is used). In addition, it is possible to clearly notify which specific display corresponds to the advance notice effect being executed and which specific display corresponds to the advance notice effect being executed.

(Means 3 for Feature 027SH)
In the gaming machines of means 1 and means 2, the specific display can be changed to a special mode after the execution of the advance notice effect corresponding to the specific display (for example, the notice effect of the type specified by the specific display). (For example, the item image A may be changed to the "notice effect end mode" at the end of execution (T16) of the cut-in notice effect, etc.).

According to the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is possible to clearly notify that the advance notice effect corresponding to the specific display has been executed (the item image has been used). In addition, it is possible to clearly notify which specific display corresponds to the executed notice effect and which specific display corresponds to the executed advance notice effect.

(Means 4 for Feature 027SH)
In the gaming machine of the means 1 to means 3, a plurality of types of the specific display can be displayed as the specific effect within a specific period prior to the predetermined period (for example, T2 to T2 shown in FIGS. 9-11). Up to four types of item images can be displayed in T14, etc.), and the specific display of each type may be displayed in any of the display modes (for example, in the scene of FIGS. 9-26 (C), the item image). A is displayed in the second display mode (level 2), item image B is displayed in the second display mode (level 2), item image C is displayed in the third display mode (level 3), and item image D is displayed. It is displayed according to the first display mode (level 1)).

According to the above-mentioned gaming machine, attention is paid to the display mode of each type of specific display, so that the interest is improved.

(Means 5 for Feature 027SH)
The gaming machine of the above means 2 can execute the advance notice effect at a plurality of timings within the predetermined period (for example, T15, T18, T21, T24 as shown in FIGS. 9-11). In addition, the advance notice effect can be executed at a plurality of execution start timings), and the execution timing of the advance notice effect differs depending on the type of the advance notice effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-11, the cut-in advance notice effect). The execution start timing of the group notice effect is T15, the execution start timing of the group notice effect is T18, the execution start timing of the button notice effect is T21, the execution start timing of the character advance notice effect is T24, and so on. The timing at which the specific display becomes the special mode differs depending on the type of the notice effect corresponding to the specific display (for example, the notice effect specified by the specific display) (for example, the item image A is a cut-in notice effect). The item image B can be changed to the "notice effect execution mode" at the time of execution (T15), the item image B can be changed to the "notice effect execution mode" at the time of execution (T18), and the item image C is a button notice. Since the item image D can be changed to the "notice effect execution mode" at the time of executing the effect (T21) and can be changed to the "notice effect execution mode" at the time of executing the character advance notice effect (T24), the item The timing at which the image becomes the "notice effect execution mode" may differ depending on the type of the advance notice effect specified by the item image).

According to the above-mentioned gaming machine, since the execution timing of the advance notice effect corresponding to the specific display is different, the complexity of the effect can be reduced.

(Means 6 for Feature 027SH)
In the game machines of the above means 1 to 5, the notice is displayed when the specific display capable of specifying the type of the notice effect is displayed before the execution of the notice effect, and before the execution of the notice effect. There are cases where the specific display that can specify the type of effect is not displayed (for example, in the example of FIG. 9-13 (B), the item image B corresponding to the button advance effect is displayed before the button advance effect is executed. However, the item image D corresponding to the character advance notice effect is not displayed before the execution of the character advance notice effect), and the specific display corresponding to the advance notice effect is displayed before the execution of the advance notice effect. The rate at which the specific display corresponding to the notice effect is not displayed before the execution of the advance notice effect is different from that in the case where the content advantageous to the player is notified, for example, FIG. B), as shown in FIGS. 9-10 (A) to 9-10 (H), when the item image corresponding to the notice effect is displayed before the advance notice effect is executed, and before the advance notice effect is executed, the notice effect is displayed. Since the execution rate of the advance notice effect is different from when the corresponding item image is not displayed, the advance notice effect is displayed when the item image corresponding to the advance notice effect is displayed before the advance notice effect is executed and before the advance notice effect is executed. When the item image corresponding to is not displayed, the jackpot expectation may be different as shown in FIGS. 9-7 (A) to 9-7 (F)).

According to the above-mentioned gaming machine, the interest is improved because attention is paid to what kind of production flow will be.

(Means 7 pertaining to feature unit 027SH)
The gaming machines of the above means 1 to 6 can change the display mode of the specific display after the display of the specific display (see, for example, FIG. 9-8), and an effect suggesting a change in the display mode of the specific display. (For example, the item image change suggestion display 027SHIGA-HEN, which suggests whether the display mode of the item image A changes, as shown in FIG. 9-17 (C)) can be executed. You may.

According to the above-mentioned gaming machine, since attention is paid to whether or not the specific display changes, the interest is improved.

(Means 8 for Feature 027SH)
The gaming machines of the above means 1 to 7 can execute variable display of the identification information, and the pre-reading determination means (for example, the pre-reading by the effect control CPU 120) determines whether or not the content advantageous to the player is notified. The advance notice setting process (step S161) and the like) are provided, the predetermined period is a period corresponding to a plurality of variable displays, and the specific display may be displayed based on the look-ahead determination. For example, a plurality of item images may be associated with one variable display, or one item image may be associated with each variable display.

According to the above-mentioned gaming machine, the degree of attention to the fluctuations to be executed later is increased, and the interest is improved.

(Means 9 for Feature 027SH)
The gaming machines of the above means 1 to 8 can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and include a disadvantage setting value and an advantageous setting value that is more advantageous to the player than the disadvantage setting value. Any of the set values can be set (see, for example, FIGS. 9-2 (A) and 9-2 (B)), and at least a part of the plurality of types of the advance notice effect suggests the set value. You may. For example, for a strong cut-in image (Fig. 9-5 (B), etc.), a normal strong cut-in image (appearance of characters A, B, etc.) and a special strong cut-in image (appearance of characters A, C, etc.) By preparing two types of strong cut-in images and setting a difference in the determination ratio of the types of the strong cut-in images, the set value may be suggested in the strong cut-in image.

According to the above-mentioned gaming machine, in addition to paying attention to whether the advance notice effect is executed after the display of the specific display, whether or not there is a suggestion of a set value in the advance notice effect displayed after the display of the specific display, the interest is improved. ..

(Means 10 pertaining to feature unit 027SH)
The gaming machines of the above means 1 to 9 can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and include a disadvantage setting value and an advantageous setting value that is more advantageous to the player than the disadvantage setting value. Any of the set values can be set (see, for example, FIGS. 9-2 (A) and 9-2 (B)), the setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value can be executed, and the specific display is , May be displayed in response to the setting suggestion effect to be executed.

According to the above-mentioned gaming machine, in addition to whether or not the advance notice effect is executed, attention is paid to the specific display regarding the suggestion of the set value, so that the interest is further improved. If there is no relationship between the item image effect that displays the item image corresponding to the advance notice effect before the execution of the advance notice effect and the setting suggestion effect that suggests the set value, there is a risk that the interest will be insufficient. In the above-mentioned game machine, the item image effect may suggest the execution of the setting suggestion effect, and since there is a relationship between the item image effect and the setting suggestion effect, the interest is improved.

(Means 11 for Feature 027SH)
The gaming machines of the above means 1 to 9 can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and include a disadvantage setting value and an advantageous setting value that is more advantageous to the player than the disadvantage setting value. Any of the set values can be set (see, for example, FIGS. 9-2 (A) and 9-2 (B)), the setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value can be executed, and the specific display is , While it may be displayed in response to the advance notice effect to be executed, it may not be displayed in response to the setting suggestion effect to be executed.

According to the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming complicated and suppress the deterioration of the interest. If the item image effect that displays the item image corresponding to the advance notice effect before the execution of the advance notice effect and the setting suggestion effect that suggests the set value are related, the effect may become complicated and the interest may be reduced. However, in the above-mentioned game machine, the item image effect does not suggest the execution of the setting suggestion effect, and the item image effect and the setting suggestion effect are independent of each other, so that the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

(Means 12 pertaining to feature unit 027SH)
The gaming machines of the above means 1 to 9 can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and include a disadvantage setting value and an advantageous setting value that is more advantageous to the player than the disadvantage setting value. Any of the set values can be set (see, for example, FIGS. 9-2 (A) and 9-2 (B)), the setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value can be executed, and the specific display can be used. The setting suggestion effect may be executed. For example, as shown in FIGS. 9-31 and 9-32, the item image D (level 4) may be used to suggest the set value.

According to the above-mentioned gaming machine, in addition to whether or not the advance notice effect is executed, attention is paid to the specific display regarding the suggestion of the set value, so that the interest is further improved. If there is no relationship between the item image effect that displays the item image corresponding to the advance notice effect before the execution of the advance notice effect and the setting suggestion effect that suggests the set value, there is a risk that the interest will be insufficient. In the above-mentioned gaming machine, the item image production is also a setting suggestion production, so that the interest is improved.

(Means 13 for Feature 027SH)
The gaming machines of the above means 1 to 9 can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and include a disadvantage setting value and an advantageous setting value that is more advantageous to the player than the disadvantage setting value. Any of the set values can be set (see, for example, FIGS. 9-2 (A) and 9-2 (B)), the setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value can be executed, and the setting suggestion effect can be executed. May be different from the advance notice effect and the specific display. For example, the set value may be suggested by the effect mode (for example, background, etc.) of the super reach effect, or the set value may be suggested by the start effect (fanfare effect) of the big hit game state.

According to the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming complicated and suppress the deterioration of the interest. If the advance notice effect, the item image effect, and the setting suggestion effect are related to each other, the effect may become complicated and the interest may be lowered. Because it is independent of, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

(Explanation of feature unit 006SH)
Next, the gaming machine related to the feature unit 006SH will be described. The gaming machine according to the feature unit 006SH is a gaming machine capable of playing a game. In this embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine 1 capable of playing a game will be described as an example.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 006SH includes a game control means and an effect executing means. The game control means is realized by, for example, the CPU 103 of the main board 11. The effect execution means is realized by, for example, the effect control CPU 120 of the effect control board 12. The effect executing means can execute various effects (for example, various notice effects, present notice effects, setting suggestion effects, etc., which will be described later).

The front view and the like of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 006SH are the same as those of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 027SH (see FIG. 9-2). However, for convenience of explanation, the movable body 027SH 32 included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 027SH is referred to as the movable body 006SH 32 in the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 006SH.

The jackpot probability (low probability state) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 006SH is the same as the jackpot probability (low probability state) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 027SH shown in FIG. 9-2 (A). .. The jackpot probability (high probability state) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 006SH is the same as the jackpot probability (high probability state) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 027SH shown in FIG. 9-2 (B). .. Further, the pachinko game machine 1 related to the feature unit 006SH may be provided with a small hit like the pachinko game machine 1 related to the feature unit 027SH, but in the following description, the pachinko game machine 1 related to the feature unit 006SH may be provided. Will be described as assuming that no small hit is provided.

The type of jackpot (big hit type) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 006SH is the same as the type of jackpot (big hit type) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 027SH shown in FIG. 9-2 (C). .. Further, the distribution of the jackpot type of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 006SH is the same as the distribution of the jackpot type of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 027SH shown in FIGS. 9-2 (D) and 9-2 (E).

The content of the fluctuation pattern of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature portion 006SH is the pachinko related to the feature portion 027SH shown in FIG. 9-3 (A), except that the fluctuation pattern # 15 (variation pattern of small hits) does not exist. This is the same as the content of the fluctuation pattern of the gaming machine 1. The determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature portion 006SH is the pachinko related to the feature portion 027SH shown in FIG. 9-3 (B), except for the portion related to the fluctuation pattern # 15 (variation pattern of small hits). This is the same as the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the gaming machine 1.

FIG. 10-1 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the advance notice effect. FIG. 10-2 is an example of the advance notice effect. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 006SH can execute a plurality of types of advance notice effects as shown in FIG. 10-1. In this embodiment, each of the plurality of types of advance notice effects can be specified by the advance notice effect patterns.

The notice effect of the notice effect pattern "YEP-A1" shown in FIG. 10-1 is the cut-in notice effect (display of a weak cut-in image) shown in FIG. 9-4. That is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 006SH has a weak cut-in image 027SHYKE-JCI as shown in FIG. 9-5 (A) as a notice effect of the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-A1". In the description of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the part 006SH, a weak cut-in image (referred to as 006SHYKE-JCI) is displayed. When the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-A1" and the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-A2" described later are not distinguished (or collectively), they are referred to as the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-A".

The notice effect of the notice effect pattern "YEP-A2" shown in FIG. 10-1 is the cut-in notice effect (display of a strong cut-in image) shown in FIG. 9-4. That is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 006SH has a strong cut-in image 027SHYKE-KCI as shown in FIG. 9-5 (B) as a notice effect of the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-A2". In the description of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the part 006SH, a strong cut-in image (referred to as 006SHYKE-KCI) is displayed.

The advance notice effect of the advance notice effect pattern “YEP-B” shown in FIG. 10-1 is the group advance notice effect (display of the group image) shown in FIG. 9-4. That is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 006SH has a group image 027SHYKE-GN (for convenience of explanation, the feature unit) as shown in FIG. 9-5 (C) as a notice effect of the notice effect pattern “YEP-B”. In the description of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to 006SH, a group image (referred to as 006SHYKE-GN) is displayed.

The notice effect of the notice effect pattern “YEP-C1” shown in FIG. 10-1 is the button notice effect (display of button image → press → weak cut-in image) shown in FIG. 9-4. That is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 006SH has a button image 027SHYKE-BU (for convenience of explanation) as shown in FIGS. 9-6 (A) and 9-6 (B) as a notice effect of the notice effect pattern "YEP-C1". , In the description of the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the feature unit 006SH, a button image 006SHYKE-BU) and a weak cut-in image 027SHYKE-JCI (weak cut-in image 006SHYKE-JCI) are displayed. The weak cut-in image displayed in the button notice effect may be different from the weak cut-in image displayed in the cut-in notice effect. When the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-C1" and the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-C2" described later are not distinguished (or collectively), they are referred to as the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-C".

The notice effect of the notice effect pattern “YEP-C2” shown in FIG. 10-1 is the button notice effect (display of button image → press → strong cut-in image) shown in FIG. 9-4. That is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 006SH has a button image 027SHYKE-BU (button image 006SHYKE) as shown in FIGS. 9-6 (C) and 9-6 (D) as a notice effect of the notice effect pattern "YEP-C2". -BU), the strong cut-in image 027SHYKE-KCI (strong cut-in image 006SHYKE-KCI) is displayed. The strong cut-in image displayed in the button notice effect may be different from the strong cut-in image displayed in the cut-in notice effect.

The advance notice effect of the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-D" shown in FIG. 10-1 is the accessory advance notice effect (operation of the accessory) shown in FIG. 9-4. That is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 006SH is a movable body 027SH32 (movable body) as shown in FIGS. 9-6 (E) (F) (G) as a notice effect of the notice effect pattern "YEP-D". 006SH32) is operated.

The advance notice effect of the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-E" shown in FIG. 10-1 is a pseudo continuous advance notice effect. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 006SH executes, for example, a pseudo continuous advance notice effect as shown in FIGS. 10-2 (A), (B), and (C) as a advance notice effect of the advance notice effect pattern “YEP-E”. .. In the example shown in FIGS. 10-2 (A), (B), and (C), the temporary stop symbol 006SH-REP is stopped (temporarily stopped) as the middle symbol (the symbol corresponding to the symbol display area 5C), and then again. , The middle symbol is re-variablely displayed.

Note that FIGS. 10-2 (D), (E), and (F) relate to other notice effects (development notice effects), which will be described in detail later. In the following description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 006SH can execute the advance notice effects of the advance notice effect patterns "YEP-A" to "YEP-E" shown in FIG. 10-1 as the advance notice effects. It is explained as.

10-3 and 10-4 are explanatory views for explaining the determination ratio of the advance notice effect and the like. FIG. 10-3 (A) is an example of a determination ratio of whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect (display of a weak cut-in image or display of a strong cut-in image). According to the example shown in FIG. 10-3 (A), when the normal reach is out of order (when the fluctuation pattern is # 12), the execution presence is determined at a rate of 10%, and when the super reach is out of order (variation pattern). In the case of either # 13 or # 14, the execution presence is determined at a rate of 20%, and in the case of a normal reach jackpot (when the fluctuation pattern is # 16), the execution existence is determined at a rate of 30%. , In the case of a super reach jackpot (in the case of either fluctuation pattern # 17 or # 18), the execution presence is determined at a rate of 30%. If the reach is not reached (if the fluctuation pattern is either # 10 or # 11), the presence or absence of execution is determined at a rate of 0% (determined not to be executed). The rate of determining whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect is common to the set values 1 to 6 (it does not depend on the set value). The same applies to the determination ratio of whether or not to execute other notice effects.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 006SH decides to execute the cut-in notice effect, it determines the notice effect pattern (“YEP-A1”, “YEP-A2”) related to the cut-in notice effect. FIG. 10-3 (B) is an example of the determination ratio of the notice effect pattern (“YEP-A1”, “YEP-A2”) of the cut-in notice effect when it is decided to execute the cut-in notice effect. According to the example shown in FIG. 10-3 (B), in the case of normal reach loss, the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-A1" is determined at a rate of 100%, and the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-A2" is 0%. Determined by the ratio of. When the super reach is lost, the notice effect pattern "YEP-A1" is determined at a rate of 80%, and the notice effect pattern "YEP-A2" is determined at a rate of 20%. In the case of a normal reach jackpot, the notice effect pattern "YEP-A1" is determined at a rate of 50%, and the notice effect pattern "YEP-A2" is determined at a rate of 50%. In the case of a super reach jackpot, the notice effect pattern "YEP-A1" is determined at a rate of 20%, and the notice effect pattern "YEP-A2" is determined at a rate of 80%. The determination ratio of the notice effect pattern of the cut-in notice effect is common to the set values 1 to 6 (it does not depend on the set value). The same applies to the determination ratio of the advance notice effect pattern of other advance notice effects.

FIG. 10-3 (C) is an example of the determination ratio of whether or not to execute the group notice effect (display of the group image). Since there is only one type of advance notice effect pattern related to the group advance notice effect (notice effect pattern "YEP-B"), the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 006SH will be used for the group advance notice effect when it is decided to execute the group advance notice effect. As the notice effect pattern, the notice effect pattern "YEP-B" is determined.

FIG. 10-3 (D) shows the determination ratio of whether or not to execute the button notice effect (display of button image → press → display of weak cut-in image, or display of button image → press → display of strong cut-in image). This is an example. FIG. 10-3 (E) is an example of the determination ratio of the advance notice effect patterns (“YEP-C1” and “YEP-C2”) related to the button advance notice effect when it is decided to execute the button advance notice effect.

FIG. 10-4 (A) is an example of the determination ratio of whether or not to execute the bonus notice effect (movement of the bonus). Since there is only one type of advance notice effect pattern related to the character advance notice effect (notice effect pattern "YEP-D"), the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 006SH decides to execute the character advance notice effect. The advance notice effect pattern "YEP-D" is determined as the advance notice effect pattern related to the advance notice effect.

FIG. 10-4 (B) is an example of the determination ratio of whether or not the pseudo-continuous notice effect is executed. Since there is only one type of notice effect pattern related to the pseudo-ream advance notice effect (notice effect pattern "YEP-E"), the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 006SH decides to execute the pseudo-ream advance notice effect. The advance notice effect pattern "YEP-E" is determined as the advance notice effect pattern related to the advance notice effect.

9-5 and 9-6 are explanatory views for explaining the present box effect and the like. The present box effect is the present box image that is not open (for example, the present box image 006SHPB-CL of FIG. 10-5 (A)) and then opened (for example, the present box image of FIG. 10-5 (B)). Present box image 006SHPB-OP) is displayed (that is, the present box is opened). In this embodiment, when the present box is opened (when the opened present box image is displayed), any of the advance notice effects shown in FIG. 10-3 (E) is executed. There are multiple types of present box effect patterns depending on the type of advance notice effect that is executed when the present box is opened (that is, which advance notice effect is executed can be specified by the present box effect pattern. Is). Since FIGS. 10-5 (C) to 10-5 (J) relate to other examples, the details will be described later.

The present box effect pattern "PBP-A" is a present box effect in which a cut-in notice effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 10-6 (A). In the example shown in FIG. 10-6 (A), when the present box is opened, the item image corresponding to the cut-in notice effect (for example, the pachinko game related to the feature unit 027SH shown in FIG. 9-9 (A) and the like). The item image A of the machine 1 without the "level" display, etc.) is displayed, and the cut-in notice effect is executed.

The present box effect pattern "PBP-B" is a present box effect in which a group notice effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 10-6 (B). In the example shown in FIG. 10-6 (B), when the present box is opened, the pachinko gaming machine according to the feature unit 027SH shown in the item image corresponding to the group notice effect (for example, FIG. 9-9 (D)). Item image B of 1 without "level" display, etc.) is displayed, and the group notice effect is executed.

The present box effect pattern "PBP-C" is a present box effect in which the button notice effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 10-6 (C). In the example shown in FIG. 10-6 (C), when the present box is opened, the item image corresponding to the button notice effect (for example, the pachinko gaming machine according to the feature unit 027SH shown in FIG. 9-9 (G) and the like). Item image C of 1 without "level" display, etc.) is displayed, and the button notice effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 10-6 (D), the present box effect pattern “PBP-D” is a present box effect in which the character advance notice effect is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 10-6 (D), when the present box is opened, the item image corresponding to the character advance notice effect (for example, the pachinko game related to the feature unit 027SH shown in FIG. 9-9 (J) and the like). The item image D of the machine 1 does not have a "level" display, etc.), and the character advance notice effect is executed.

The present box effect pattern "PBP-E" is a present box effect in which a pseudo-continuous notice effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 10-6 (E). In the example shown in FIG. 10-6 (E), when the present box is opened, an item image corresponding to the pseudo-continuous notice effect (for example, an item image displayed as "re") is displayed, and the pseudo-continuous notice effect is displayed. Will be executed.

As shown in FIGS. 10-5 (A), 10-6 (A) to 10-6 (E), an unopened present box image (present box image 006SHPB-CL), an open present box The image (present box image 006SHPB-OP) is common regardless of the present box effect pattern. That is, the player does not know which advance notice effect will be executed before the present box is opened in the present box effect.

FIG. 10-7 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the determination ratio of whether or not the present box effect is executed. FIG. 10-7 (A) shows a present box effect (present box effect pattern “PBP-A”) targeting (targeting) the execution of the cut-in notice effect when the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A) is executed. This is an example of the determination rate of whether or not to execute. According to FIG. 10-7 (A), the present box effect (PBP-A) is determined to be executed at a rate of 15% in the case of a loss, and the present box effect (PBP-A) is determined in the case of a big hit. ) Is executed at a rate of 90%. If the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A) is not executed, the presence or absence of the present box effect (PBP-A) is determined at a rate of 0% (when the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A) is not executed). Does not perform present box production (PBP-A)).

According to the example shown in FIG. 10-7 (A), the present box effect (PBP-A) corresponding to the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A) is executed before the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A) is executed. It is more likely to be a big hit when the present box effect (PBP-A) corresponding to the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A) is not executed before the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A) is executed. That is, for example, according to the example shown in FIG. 10-7 (A), in the case of an outlier, the cut-in notice effect (PBP-A) is not accompanied by the execution of the present box effect (PBP-A). While YEP-A) is executed, in the case of a big hit, the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A) is executed with the execution of the present box effect (PBP-A) in most cases (90%). Therefore, when the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A) is executed with the execution of the present box effect (PBP-A), the cut is performed without executing the present box effect (PBP-A). It is more likely to be a big hit than when the in-notice effect (YEP-A) is executed.

FIG. 10-7 (B) shows the determination of whether or not the present box effect (present box effect pattern “PBP-B”) for executing the group advance notice effect (YEP-B) is executed when the group advance notice effect (YEP-B) is executed. This is an example of the ratio. According to FIG. 10-7 (B), the present box effect (PBP-B) is determined to be executed at a rate of 25% in the case of a loss, and the present box effect (PBP-B) is determined in the case of a big hit. ) Is executed at a rate of 90%. If the group notice effect (YEP-B) is not executed, the presence or absence of the present box effect (PBP-B) is determined at a rate of 0% (if the group notice effect (YEP-B) is not executed). Present box production (PBP-B) is not executed).

According to the example shown in FIG. 10-7 (B), as in the relationship between the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A) and the present box effect (PBP-A), before the group advance notice effect (YEP-B) is executed. When the present box effect (PBP-B) corresponding to the group notice effect (YEP-B) is executed, the group notice effect (YEP-B) is supported before the group notice effect (YEP-B) is executed. It is more likely to be a big hit than when the present box effect (PBP-B) is not executed.

FIG. 10-7 (C) shows the determination of whether or not the present box effect (present box effect pattern “PBP-C”) for executing the button advance effect (YEP-C) is executed when the button advance effect (YEP-C) is executed. This is an example of the ratio. According to FIG. 10-7 (C), the present box effect (PBP-C) is determined to be executed at a rate of 10% in the case of a loss, and the present box effect (PBP-C) is determined in the case of a big hit. ) Is executed at a rate of 60%. If the button notice effect (YEP-C) is not executed, the presence or absence of the present box effect (PBP-C) is determined at a rate of 0% (if the button notice effect (YEP-C) is not executed). Present box production (PBP-C) is not executed).

According to the example shown in FIG. 10-7 (C), before the button advance notice effect (YEP-C) is executed, as in the relationship between the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A) and the present box effect (PBP-A). When the present box effect (PBP-C) corresponding to the button advance effect (YEP-C) is executed, the button advance effect (YEP-C) is set before the button advance effect (YEP-C) is executed. It is more likely to be a big hit than when the corresponding present box effect (PBP-C) is not executed.

FIG. 10-7 (D) shows whether or not the present box effect (present box effect pattern “PBP-D”) for executing the character advance notice effect is executed when the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is executed. This is an example of the determination ratio of. According to FIG. 10-7 (D), the present box effect (PBP-D) is determined to be executed at a rate of 5% in the case of a loss, and the present box effect (PBP-D) is determined in the case of a big hit. ) Is executed at a rate of 80%. If the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is not executed, the presence or absence of the present box effect (PBP-D) is determined at a rate of 0% (when the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is not executed). Does not perform present box production (PBP-D)).

According to the example shown in FIG. 10-7 (D), the execution of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is similar to the relationship between the cut-in advance notice effect (YEP-A) and the present box effect (PBP-A). When the present box effect (PBP-D) corresponding to the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is executed before, the character advance notice effect (YEP) is performed before the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is executed. It is more likely to be a big hit than when the present box effect (PBP-D) corresponding to −D) is not executed.

FIG. 10-7 (E) shows whether or not the present box effect (present box effect pattern “PBP-E”) for executing the pseudo-continuous notice effect is executed when the pseudo-continuous notice effect (YEP-E) is executed. This is an example of the determination ratio of. According to FIG. 10-7 (E), the present box effect (PBP-E) is determined to be executed at a rate of 25% in the case of a loss, and the present box effect (PBP-E) is determined in the case of a big hit. ) Is executed at a rate of 60%. If the pseudo-continuous notice effect (YEP-E) is not executed, the presence or absence of the present box effect (PBP-E) is determined at a rate of 0% (when the pseudo-continuous notice effect (YEP-E) is not executed). Does not perform present box production (PBP-E)).

According to the example shown in FIG. 10-7 (E), the pseudo continuous advance notice effect (YEP-E) is executed as in the relationship between the cut-in advance notice effect (YEP-A) and the present box effect (PBP-A). When the present box effect (PBP-E) corresponding to the pseudo-continuous notice effect (YEP-E) is executed before, the pseudo-continuous notice effect (YEP) is executed before the pseudo-continuous notice effect (YEP-E) is executed. It is more likely to be a big hit than when the present box effect (PBP-E) corresponding to −E) is not executed.

FIG. 10-8 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the setting suggestion effect. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 006SH can execute a plurality of types of setting suggestion effects.

The setting suggestion effect of the setting suggestion effect pattern "SEP-ATU" shown in FIG. 10-8 (A) displays, for example, the thermal character image 006SHSEP-ATU as shown in FIG. 10-8 (B). It is a hot character production. As will be described with reference to FIG. 10-9, the thermal character effect suggests a set value when it is out of order, but does not suggest a set value when it is a big hit.

The setting suggestion effect of the setting suggestion effect pattern “SEP-EYE1” shown in FIG. 10-8 (A) is, for example, the eye-catching image 006SHSEP- in a normal mode as shown in FIG. 10-8 (C). This is a normal eye-catching effect that displays EYE1. In the eye-catching image 006SHSEP-EYE1 shown in FIG. 10-8 (C), the character's yukata is plain. As will be described with reference to FIG. 10-10, the normal eye-catching effect is executed when the super reach is out of order (when either the fluctuation pattern # 13 or # 14 is achieved), and the special eye-catching effect (described later) is increased. Not, but suggests a setting.

The setting suggestion effect of the setting suggestion effect pattern “SEP-EYE2” shown in FIG. 10-8 (A) is, for example, an eye-catching image 006SHSEP- as shown in FIG. 10-8 (D). This is a special eye-catching effect that displays EYE2. In the eye-catching image 006SHSEP-EYE2 shown in FIG. 10-8 (D), the character's yukata has a goldfish pattern. As will be described with reference to FIG. 10-10, the special eye-catching effect is executed when the super reach is out of order (when any of the fluctuation patterns # 13 and # 14 is obtained), and the set value is suggested. When SEP-EYE1 (normal eye-catching effect) and SEP-EYE2 (special eye-catching effect) are not distinguished (or collectively), they are referred to as SEP-EYE (eye-catching effect).

The eye-catching image (eye-catching image 006SHSEP-EYE1, eye-catching image 006SHSEP-EYE2) is an image displayed when the normal background (non-reach background) is switched from the effect background during reach.

FIG. 10-9 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a determination ratio of whether or not to execute the thermal character effect (setting suggestion effect pattern “SEP-ATU”). FIG. 10-9 (A) is an example of the determination ratio of whether or not the thermal character effect is executed when the set value is 1 to 5. According to the example shown in FIG. 10-9 (A), when the normal reach is out of order (when the fluctuation pattern is # 12), the execution presence is determined at a rate of 1%, and when the super reach A is out of order (variation). In the case of pattern # 13), the presence of execution is determined at a rate of 2%, and in the case of out of Super Reach B (in the case of fluctuation pattern # 14), the presence of execution is determined at a rate of 2%, and normal reach is determined. In the case of a big hit (when it becomes a fluctuation pattern # 16), the execution presence is determined at a rate of 40%, and in the case of a super reach A big hit (when it becomes a fluctuation pattern # 17), the execution existence is 60%. It is decided by the ratio, and when it becomes a super reach B big hit (when it becomes the fluctuation pattern # 18), the execution presence is decided at the ratio of 70%. If the reach is not reached (if the fluctuation pattern is either # 10 or # 11), the presence or absence of execution is determined at a rate of 0% (determined not to be executed).

FIG. 10-9 (B) is an example of a determination ratio of whether or not to execute the thermal character effect (setting suggestion effect pattern “SEP-ATU”) when the set value is 6. According to the example shown in FIG. 10-9 (B), when the normal reach is out of order (when the fluctuation pattern is # 12), the execution presence is determined at a rate of 5%, and when the super reach A is out of order (variation). In the case of pattern # 13), the execution presence is determined at a rate of 10%, and in the case of a deviation from Super Reach B (in the case of fluctuation pattern # 14), the execution presence is determined at a rate of 10%, and the normal reach is determined. In the case of a big hit (when it becomes a fluctuation pattern # 16), the execution presence is determined at a rate of 40%, and in the case of a super reach A big hit (when it becomes a fluctuation pattern # 17), the execution existence is 60%. It is decided by the ratio, and when it becomes a super reach B big hit (when it becomes the fluctuation pattern # 18), the execution presence is decided at the ratio of 70%. If the reach is not reached (if the fluctuation pattern is either # 10 or # 11), the presence or absence of execution is determined at a rate of 0% (determined not to be executed).

According to FIGS. 10-9 (A) and 10-9 (B), the hot character effect is an effect with a relatively high expectation of a big hit (an effect in which the decision rate of execution is relatively small in the case of a loss). be. More specifically, the jackpot expectation of the thermal character effect when the set value is 1 to 5 is higher than the jackpot expectation of the thermal character effect when the set value is 6 (the thermal character in the case of a loss). The determination rate of whether or not the effect is executed is lower when the set value is 1 to 5 than when the set value is 6).

The determination rate of whether or not the thermal character effect is executed in the case of a loss is lower when the set value is 1 to 5 than when the set value is 6 (that is, when the set value is 6). (Because is higher than when the set value is 1 to 5), the heat character effect is executed, and the frequency of loss is 1 to 1 when the set value is 6. It is higher than when it is 5 (specifically, when focusing on the same type of reach, when the set value is 6, it is 5 times higher than when the set value is 1 to 5). Therefore, the player can infer whether the set value is 1 to 5 or the set value is 6, depending on the frequency with which the heat character effect is executed and the character is out of order. For example, a player has a hot character effect and has developed into a super reach, but the frequency of the result is usually (usually the set value is one of 1 to 5). If you feel that there are more than (S), it is possible to infer that the set value is 6.

On the other hand, in the case of a big hit, the determination rate of whether or not the hot character effect is executed is the same between when the set value is 1 to 5 and when the set value is 6, so that the heat character effect is executed and The frequency of big hits does not change when the set value is 1 to 5 or when the set value is 6. Therefore, the player cannot infer whether the set value is 1 to 5 or the set value is 6 depending on the frequency with which the hot character effect is executed and the jackpot is hit.

That is, as described above, the thermal character effect suggests a set value when it is out of order, but does not suggest a set value when it is a big hit.

FIG. 10-10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the determination ratio of whether or not the eye-catching effect (normal eye-catching effect, special eye-catching effect) is executed. FIG. 10-10 (A) is an example of the determination ratio of whether or not the eye-catching effect is executed. The determination ratio of whether or not to execute the eye-catching effect is common to the set values 1 to 6 (it does not depend on the set value). According to the example shown in FIG. 10-10 (A), when the super reach A is out of order (when the fluctuation pattern # 13 is reached), the execution presence is determined at a rate of 100%, and the super reach B is out of order. (In the case of fluctuation pattern # 14), the execution presence is also determined at a rate of 100%. In cases other than the above (when any of the fluctuation patterns # 10 to # 12 and # 16 to # 18 is obtained), the presence or absence of execution is determined at a rate of 0% (determined not to be executed). That is, as described above, the eye-catching effect (normal eye-catching effect, special eye-catching effect) is executed when the super reach is out of alignment (when any of the fluctuation patterns # 13 and # 14 is achieved).

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 006SH decides to execute the eye-catching effect, it determines the setting suggestion effect pattern (“SEP-EYE1”, “SEP-EYE2”) related to the eye-catching effect. FIG. 10-10 (B) shows the determination ratios of the setting suggestion effect patterns (“SEP-EYE1” and “SEP-EYE2”) when it is determined to execute the eye-catching effect when the set values are 1 to 3. This is an example. According to the example shown in FIG. 10-10 (B), when the super reach A is out of alignment, the normal eye-catching effect (setting suggestion effect pattern "SEP-EYE1") is determined at a ratio of 90%, and the special eye is determined. The catch effect (setting suggestion effect pattern "SEP-EYE2") is determined at a rate of 10%, and if Super Reach B is out of the range, the normal eye catch effect (setting suggestion effect pattern "SEP-EYE1") is 95%. The special eye-catching effect (setting suggestion effect pattern "SEP-EYE2") is determined at a rate of 5%.

FIG. 10-10 (C) shows the determination ratio of the setting suggestion effect pattern (“SEP-EYE1”, “SEP-EYE2”) when it is determined to execute the eye-catching effect when the set value is 4 to 6. This is an example. According to the example shown in FIG. 10-10 (C), when the super reach A is out of alignment, the normal eye-catching effect (setting suggestion effect pattern "SEP-EYE1") is determined at a rate of 60%, and the special eye is determined. The catch effect (setting suggestion effect pattern "SEP-EYE2") is determined at a rate of 40%, and if Super Reach B is out of the range, the normal eye catch effect (setting suggestion effect pattern "SEP-EYE1") is 60%. The special eye-catching effect (setting suggestion effect pattern "SEP-EYE2") is determined at a rate of 40%.

The determination ratio of the special eye-catching effect (setting suggestion effect pattern "SEP-EYE2") when Super Reach A is out of order is when the set value is 4 to 6 and when the set value is 1 to 3. Because it is higher than, the frequency at which Super Reach A is out of order and the special eye-catching effect is executed is higher when the set value is 4 to 6 than when the set value is 1 to 3 ( Specifically, when the set value is 4 to 6, it is four times higher than when the set value is 1 to 3). Therefore, the player can infer whether the set value is 1 to 3 or 4 to 6 depending on the frequency with which the super reach A is out of line and the special eye-catching effect is executed. .. For example, the player is out of Super Reach A and the frequency at which the special eye-catching effect is executed is higher than usual (usually, the set value is one of 1 to 3). If you feel it, you can infer that the set value is 4-6.

The determination ratio of the special eye-catching effect (setting suggestion effect pattern "SEP-EYE2") when Super Reach B is out of order is when the set value is 4 to 6 and when the set value is 1 to 3. Because it is higher than, the frequency at which Super Reach B is out of order and the special eye-catching effect is executed is higher when the set value is 4 to 6 than when the set value is 1 to 3 ( Specifically, when the set value is 4 to 6, it is 8 times higher than when the set value is 1 to 3). Therefore, the player can infer whether the set value is 1 to 3 or 4 to 6 depending on the frequency with which the super reach B is out of alignment and the special eye-catching effect is executed. .. For example, if the player is out of Super Reach B and the special eye-catching effect is executed more frequently than usual (usually, the set value is one of 1 to 3). If you feel it, you can infer that the set value is 4-6.

The difference in the frequency with which the special eye-catching effect is executed depending on whether the set value is 1 to 3 or 4 to 6 is out of Super Reach A, and the special eye-catching effect is executed. The player is out of Super Reach A because it is out of Super Reach B and the case where the special eye-catching effect is executed is larger than in the case (the former is 4 times difference, the latter is 8 times difference). It is easier to be confident in estimating the set value by yourself if it is out of Super Reach B and the frequency at which the special eye-catching effect is executed rather than the frequency at which the special eye-catching effect is executed. It has become. As an example, consider a case in which there are a total of two fluctuations that have evolved into Super Reach A and have become out of order, and both times have been a special eye-catching effect. 1% (10% x 10%. The denominator is the number of fluctuations that evolved into Super Reach A and eventually became out of order), while it evolved into Super Reach B and eventually became out of sync. Considering the case where there were two fluctuations in total and both were special eye-catching effects, the case was 0.25% (5% x 5%. The denominator was super reach) when the set value was 1-3. Since it occurs only at the rate of the number of fluctuations that evolved into A and eventually became out of order (that is, there were a total of two fluctuations that evolved into Super Reach A and eventually became out of order), and both were special eyes. Compared to the case where it was a catch effect, the set value is 1 to 3 in the case where there were a total of 2 fluctuations that developed into Super Reach B and eventually became out of order, and both times were a special eye catch effect. (Because it is easy to deny that it is), the set value is estimated in the case where there were a total of 2 fluctuations that developed into Super Reach B and eventually became out of order, and both were special eye-catching effects (because it was a special eye-catching effect). It is easier to be confident in the set value (estimated to be 4 to 6 instead of 1 to 3).

If the special eye-catching effect is not executed at the out-of-super reach, the normal eye-catching effect is executed (see FIGS. 10-10 (B) and (C)). , Is synonymous with non-execution of special eye-catching production at the out of super reach. Therefore, although not as much as the suggestion by the special eye-catching effect, the set value is also suggested by the normal eye-catching effect. As an example, considering a case in which there are a total of two fluctuations that have evolved into Super Reach A and are eventually out of order, and both of them are normal eye-catching effects, the set value is 1 to 3 in this case. It occurs at a rate of 81% (90% x 90%. The denominator is the number of fluctuations that evolved into Super Reach A and eventually became out of order), and 36% (60%) when the set value is 4 to 6. × 60%. Since the denominator is generated at the ratio of the number of fluctuations that evolved into Super Reach A and eventually became out of order), even if the set value is estimated, it seems to be a relatively uncertain estimation. On the other hand, considering the case where there were a total of two fluctuations that developed into Super Reach A and eventually became out of order, and both were special eye-catching effects, this case is when the set value is 1-3. It occurs at a rate of 1% (10% x 10%. The denominator is the number of fluctuations that evolved into Super Reach A and eventually became out of order), and 24% (40% x 40%) when the set value is 4 to 6. 40%. Since the denominator is generated at the ratio of the number of fluctuations that developed into Super Reach A and eventually became out of order), even if it is estimated that the set value is 4 to 6 instead of 1 to 3, it is divided. Seems to be a valid estimate. In other words, there were a total of two fluctuations that developed into Super Reach A and eventually became out of order, and compared to the case where both were normal eye-catching productions, it developed into Super Reach A and eventually became out of order. It is easier to estimate the set value in the case where there are a total of two fluctuations and both times are special eye-catching effects.

FIG. 10-11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating various timings. Specifically, FIG. 10-11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the execution timing and the like of various effects in the variable display that becomes super reach.

In FIG. 10-11, T0 is the start timing during the variable display. T1 is the timing at which the present box image (the unopened present box image 006SHPB-CL shown in FIG. 10-5 (A)) is displayed when the present box effect is executed. In T1, a plurality of present box images (present box image 006SHPB-CL) are displayed when a plurality of present box effects corresponding to each of the plurality of advance notice effects are executed. For example, a present box effect (PBP-A) targeting the execution of the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A) and a present box effect (PBP) targeting the execution of the group notice effect (YEP-B). -B) and two present box images (present box image 006SHPB-CL) are displayed. T2 is the timing to reach.

T3 is the opening timing of one present box image when the present box effect (PBP-A) for executing the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A) is executed. In other words, T3 changes one of the unopened present box image 006SHPPB-CL shown in FIG. 10-5 (A) to the open present box image 006SHPB-OP shown in FIG. 10-5 (B). It is the timing to make it.

T4 is the timing to start the execution of the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A). T5 is the timing at which the execution of the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A) is finished. That is, T4 to T5 are execution periods of the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A).

T6 is the opening timing of one present box image when the present box effect (PBP-B) for executing the group notice effect (YEP-B) is executed. In other words, T6 changes one of the unopened present box image 006SHPPB-CL shown in FIG. 10-5 (A) to the open present box image 006SHPB-OP shown in FIG. 10-5 (B). It is the timing to make it.

T7 is the timing to start the execution of the group notice effect (YEP-B). T8 is the timing to end the execution of the group notice effect (YEP-B). That is, T7 to T8 are execution periods of the group notice effect (YEP-B).

T9 is the opening timing of one present box image when the present box effect (PBP-E) for executing the pseudo-continuous notice effect (YEP-E) is executed. In other words, T9 changes one of the unopened present box image 006SHPPB-CL shown in FIG. 10-5 (A) to the open present box image 006SHPB-OP shown in FIG. 10-5 (B). It is the timing to make it.

T10 is the timing at which the execution of the pseudo-continuous notice effect (YEP-E) is started. T13 is a timing at which the execution of the pseudo-continuous notice effect (YEP-E) is finished. That is, T10 to T13 are execution periods of the pseudo-continuous notice effect (YEP-E).

T11 is the timing to start the execution of the thermal character effect (SEP-ATU). T12 is the timing at which the execution of the thermal character effect (SEP-ATU) is finished. That is, T11 to T12 are execution periods of the thermal character effect (SEP-ATU). T14 is the timing to develop into super reach.

T15 is the opening timing of one present box image when the present box effect (PBP-C) for executing the button notice effect (YEP-C) is executed. In other words, T15 changes one of the unopened present box image 006SHPPB-CL shown in FIG. 10-5 (A) to the open present box image 006SHPB-OP shown in FIG. 10-5 (B). It is the timing to make it.

T16 is the timing to start the execution of the button notice effect (YEP-C). T17 is the timing to end the execution of the button notice effect (YEP-C). That is, T17 to T18 are execution periods of the button notice effect (YEP-C).

T18 is the opening timing of one present box image when the present box effect (PBP-D) for executing the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is executed. In other words, T18 changes one of the unopened present box image 006SHPPB-CL shown in FIG. 10-5 (A) to the open present box image 006SHPB-OP shown in FIG. 10-5 (B). It is the timing to make it.

T19 is the timing to start the execution of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D). T20 is the timing at which the execution of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is finished. That is, T19 to T20 are execution periods of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D).

Ta21 to Ta22 are the out-of-print symbol stop display periods in the case of out-of-order. Ta22 to Ta23 are execution periods of the eye-catching effect. Tb21 to Tb23 are jackpot symbol stop display periods in the case of a jackpot.

10-12 to 10-14 are specific examples of various timings. In FIG. 10-12 (A), the fluctuation pattern is out of the normal reach (variation pattern # 12), the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1) is executed, and the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1) is executed. It shows various timings when the present box effect (PBP-A) is executed. Note that the setting suggestion effect (heat character effect, eye-catching effect) is not executed.

In FIG. 10-12 (A), T1 is the timing at which one present box image 006SHPB-CL is displayed. That is, in T1, the present box image 006SHPB-CL of the present box effect (PBP-A) for executing the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1) is displayed. T2 is the timing to reach.

T3 is a timing for changing the present box image 006SHPB-CL of the present box effect (PBP-A) displayed in T1 to the present box image 006SHPB-OP. T4 to T5 are execution periods of the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1).

In FIG. 10-12 (B), the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach jackpot (variation pattern # 16), and the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A2), the group advance notice effect (YEP-B), and the pseudo-continuous advance notice effect (YEP-E). ) Is executed, and a present box effect (PBP-B) for executing the group notice effect (YEP-B) and a present box effect (PBP-) for executing the pseudo-continuous notice effect (YEP-E). E) and are executed, and various timings when the thermal character effect (SEP-ATU) is executed are shown.

In FIG. 10-12 (B), T1 is the timing at which the two present box images 006SHPB-CL are displayed. That is, in T1, the present box image 006SHPB-CL of the present box effect (PBP-B), which targets the execution of the group notice effect (YEP-B), and the pseudo-continuous advance notice effect (YEP-E) are targeted for execution. The present box image 006SHPB-CL of the present box effect (PBP-E) is displayed. T2 is the timing to reach.

T4 to T5 are execution periods of the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A2). That is, the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A2) is executed without the present box effect (PBP-A) being performed (without changing the present box image 006SHPB-CL to the present box image 006SHPB-OP). NS.

T6 is a timing for changing the present box image 006SHPB-CL of the present box effect (PBP-B) displayed in T1 to the present box image 006SHPB-OP. T7 to T8 are execution periods of the group notice effect (YEP-B).

T9 is a timing for changing the present box image 006SHPB-CL of the present box effect (PBP-E) displayed in T1 to the present box image 006SHPB-OP. T10 to T13 are execution periods of the pseudo-continuous notice effect (YEP-E). T11 to T12 are execution periods of the thermal character effect (SEP-ATU).

In FIG. 10-13, the variation pattern is out of Super Reach B (variation pattern # 14), the button advance notice effect (YEP-C1) and the pseudo-continuous advance notice effect (YEP-E) are executed, and the button advance notice effect (YEP) is executed. -The present box effect (PBP-C) for the execution of C1) and the present box effect (PBP-E) for the execution of the pseudo-continuous notice effect (YEP-E) are executed, and the hot character effect (PBP-E) is executed. It shows various timings when the SEP-ATU) and the special eye-catching effect (SEP-EYE2) are executed.

In FIG. 10-13, T1 is the timing at which the two present box images 006SHPB-CL are displayed. That is, in T1, the present box image 006SHPB-CL of the present box effect (PBP-C), which targets the execution of the button advance notice effect (YEP-C1), and the pseudo-continuous advance notice effect (YEP-E) are targeted for execution. The present box image 006SHPB-CL of the present box effect (PBP-E) is displayed. T2 is the timing to reach.

T9 is a timing for changing the present box image 006SHPB-CL of the present box effect (PBP-E) displayed in T1 to the present box image 006SHPB-OP. T10 to T13 are execution periods of the pseudo-continuous notice effect (YEP-E). T11 to T12 are execution periods of the thermal character effect (SEP-ATU). T14 is the timing to develop into super reach.

T15 is a timing for changing the present box image 006SHPB-CL of the present box effect (PBP-C) displayed in T1 to the present box image 006SHPB-OP. T17 to T18 are execution periods of the button notice effect (YEP-C1). Ta21 to Ta22 are outlier symbol stop display periods. Ta22 to Ta23 are execution periods of the special eye-catching effect.

In FIG. 10-14, the fluctuation pattern is a super reach B jackpot (variation pattern # 18), and the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A2), the group advance notice effect (YEP-B), and the button advance notice effect (YEP-C2) are shown. The character notice effect (YEP-D) and the pseudo-continuous notice effect (YEP-E) are executed, and the present box effect (PBP-A) and the group notice for the execution of the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A2) are executed. Present box effect (PBP-B) for execution of effect (YEP-B), present box effect (PBP-C) for execution of button advance notice effect (YEP-C2), and character advance notice effect (YEP) The present box effect (PBP-D) for the execution of −D) and the present box effect (PBP-E) for the execution of the pseudo-continuous notice effect (YEP-E) are executed, and the hot character effect (PBP-E) is executed. It shows various timings when SEP-ATU) is executed.

In FIG. 10-14, T1 is the timing at which the five present box images 006SHPB-CL are displayed. That is, in T1, the present box image 006SHPB-CL of the present box effect (PBP-A) for the execution of the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A2) and the group advance notice effect (YEP-B) are targeted for execution. Present box effect (PBP-B) present box image 006SHPB-CL, present box effect (PBP-C) present box image 006SHPB-CL for executing button advance notice effect (YEP-C2), character advance notice effect Present box effect of present box effect (PBP-D) for execution of (YEP-D) 006SHPB-CL, present box effect for execution of pseudo-continuous notice effect (YEP-E) (PBP-E) Present box image 006SHPB-CL is displayed. T2 is the timing to reach.

T3 is a timing for changing the present box image 006SHPB-CL of the present box effect (PBP-A) displayed in T1 to the present box image 006SHPB-OP. T4 to T5 are execution periods of the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A2).

T6 is a timing for changing the present box image 006SHPB-CL of the present box effect (PBP-B) displayed in T1 to the present box image 006SHPB-OP. T7 to T8 are execution periods of the group notice effect (YEP-B).

T9 is a timing for changing the present box image 006SHPB-CL of the present box effect (PBP-E) displayed in T1 to the present box image 006SHPB-OP. T10 to T13 are execution periods of the pseudo-continuous notice effect (YEP-E). T11 to T12 are execution periods of the thermal character effect (SEP-ATU). T14 is the timing to develop into super reach.

T15 is a timing for changing the present box image 006SHPB-CL of the present box effect (PBP-C) displayed in T1 to the present box image 006SHPB-OP. T17 to T18 are execution periods of the button notice effect (YEP-C2).

T19 is a timing for changing the present box image 006SHPB-CL of the present box effect (PBP-D) displayed in T1 to the present box image 006SHPB-OP. T19 to T20 are execution periods of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D). Tb21 to Tb22 are jackpot symbol stop display periods.

(Direction decision process A (decision about notice production and present box production)
10-15 to 10-17 are flowcharts showing an example of the effect determination process A executed in the variable display start setting process of S171 in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. The flowchart of FIG. 10-16 is a continuation of the flowchart of FIG. 10-15. The flowchart of FIG. 10-17 is a continuation of the flowchart of FIG. 10-16.

In the effect determination process A shown in FIG. 10-15, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect based on the fluctuation pattern (step 006SHS100). For example, as shown in FIG. 10-3 (A), if the fluctuation pattern is out of reach (either fluctuation pattern # 10 or # 11), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution is performed at a rate of 0%. However, if the fluctuation pattern is out of normal reach (variation pattern # 12), execution is determined at a rate of 10%, and if the fluctuation pattern is out of super reach (variation pattern # 13 or # 14), execution is possible. Is determined at a rate of 20%, and if the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach jackpot (fluctuation pattern # 16), the execution presence is determined at a rate of 30%, and the fluctuation pattern is either super reach jackpot (variation pattern # 17 or # 18). If), the execution status is determined at a rate of 30%.

Following step 006SHS100, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the cut-in notice effect is determined to be executed (step 006SHS101). If it is determined that the cut-in notice effect is to be executed (step 006SHS101; YES), the process proceeds to step 006SHS102. If it is not determined that the cut-in notice effect is to be executed (step 006SHS101; NO), the process proceeds to step 006SHS110.

Following step 006SHS101 (YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines the type of cut-in advance notice effect (that is, the advance notice effect pattern) based on the fluctuation pattern (step 006SHS102). For example, as shown in FIG. 10-3 (B), if the fluctuation pattern is out of the normal reach, the effect control CPU 120 determines the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-A1" at 100%, and determines the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-A1". "A2" is determined by 0%. Further, if the fluctuation pattern is out of the super reach, the effect control CPU 120 determines the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-A1" at 80% and determines the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-A2" at 20%. Further, if the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 determines the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-A1" at 50% and determines the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-A2" at 50%. Further, if the fluctuation pattern is a super reach jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 determines the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-A1" at 20% and determines the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-A2" at 80%.

Following step 006SHS102, the effect control CPU 120 sets the advance notice effect pattern (notice effect pattern "YEP-A1" or advance notice effect pattern "YEP-A2") of the cut-in advance notice effect determined in step 006SHS102 (step). 006SHS103).

Following step 006SHS103, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the present box effect (PBP-A) for executing the cut-in notice effect (target) based on the fluctuation pattern (step 006SHS104). For example, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (A), if the fluctuation pattern is a deviation pattern, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the present box effect (PBP-A) is executed at a rate of 15%. If the fluctuation pattern is a jackpot fluctuation pattern, the presence or absence of the present box effect (PBP-A) is determined at a rate of 90%.

Following step 006SHS104, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the present box effect (PBP-A) is determined to be executed (step 006SHS105). If it is determined that the present box effect (PBP-A) is to be executed (step 006SHS105; YES), the process proceeds to step 006SHS106. If it is not determined that the present box effect (PBP-A) is to be executed (step 006SHS105; NO), the process proceeds to step 006SHS110.

Following step 006SHS105 (YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the present box effect pattern “PBP-A” (step 006SHS106).

Following step 006SHS101 (NO), step 006SHS105 (NO), or step 006SHS106, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the group notice effect based on the fluctuation pattern (step 006SHS110). For example, as shown in FIG. 10-3 (C), if the fluctuation pattern is out of reach (either fluctuation pattern # 10 or # 11), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution is performed at a rate of 0%. However, if the fluctuation pattern is out of normal reach (variation pattern # 12), execution is determined at a rate of 2%, and if the fluctuation pattern is out of super reach (variation pattern # 13 or # 14), execution is possible. Is determined at a rate of 30%, and if the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach jackpot (fluctuation pattern # 16), the execution presence is determined at a rate of 25%, and the fluctuation pattern is either super reach jackpot (variation pattern # 17 or # 18). If), the execution status is determined at a rate of 50%.

Following step 006SHS110, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the group advance notice effect is determined to be executed (step 006SHS111). If it is determined that the group notice effect is to be executed (step 006SHS111; YES), the process proceeds to step 006SHS113. If it is not determined that the group notice effect is to be executed (step 006SHS111; NO), the process proceeds to step 006SHS120 of FIG. 10-16.

Following step 006SHS111 (YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the advance notice effect pattern “YEP-B” for the group advance notice effect (step 006SHS113).

Following step 006SHS113, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the present box effect (PBP-B) for executing the group notice effect (target) based on the fluctuation pattern (step 006SHS114). For example, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (B), if the fluctuation pattern is a deviation pattern, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the present box effect (PBP-B) is executed at a rate of 25%. If the fluctuation pattern is a jackpot fluctuation pattern, the presence or absence of the present box effect (PBP-B) is determined at a rate of 90%.

Following step 006SHS114, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the present box effect (PBP-B) is determined to be executed (step 006SHS115). If it is determined that the present box effect (PBP-B) is to be executed (step 006SHS115; YES), the process proceeds to step 006SHS116. If it is not determined that the present box effect (PBP-B) is to be executed (step 006SHS115; NO), the process proceeds to step 006SHS120 of FIG. 10-16.

Following step 006SHS115 (YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the present box effect pattern “PBP-B” (step 006SHS116).

Following step 006SHS101 (NO), step 006SHS105 (NO), or step 006SHS106 of FIG. 10-15, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the button advance effect based on the fluctuation pattern (FIG. 10-16). Step 006SHS120). For example, as shown in FIG. 10-3 (D), if the fluctuation pattern is out of reach (either fluctuation pattern # 10 or # 11), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution is performed at a rate of 0%. However, if the fluctuation pattern is out of normal reach (variation pattern # 12), execution is determined at a rate of 0%, and if the fluctuation pattern is out of super reach (variation pattern # 13 or # 14), execution is possible. Is determined at a rate of 25%, and if the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach jackpot (fluctuation pattern # 16), the execution presence is determined at a rate of 0%, and the fluctuation pattern is either super reach jackpot (variation pattern # 17 or # 18). If), the execution status is determined at a rate of 50%.

Following step 006SHS120, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined that the button advance effect is executed (step 006SHS121). If it is determined that the button notice effect is to be executed (step 006SHS121; YES), the process proceeds to step 006SHS122. If it is not determined that the button notice effect is to be executed (step 006SHS121; NO), the process proceeds to step 006SHS130.

Following step 006SHS121 (YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines the type of button advance notice effect (that is, the advance notice effect pattern) based on the fluctuation pattern (step 006SHS122). For example, as shown in FIG. 10-3 (E), if the fluctuation pattern is out of the super reach, the effect control CPU 120 determines the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-C1" at 90%, and the advance notice effect pattern "YEP". -C2 "is determined by 10%. Further, if the fluctuation pattern is a super reach jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 determines the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-C1" at 10% and determines the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-C2" at 90%.

Following step 006SHS122, the effect control CPU 120 sets the advance notice effect pattern (notice effect pattern "YEP-C1" or advance notice effect pattern "YEP-C2") of the button advance notice effect determined in step 006SHS122 (step 006SHS123). ).

Following step 006SHS123, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the present box effect (PBP-C) targeting (targeting) the execution of the button notice effect (step 006SHS124). For example, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (C), if the fluctuation pattern is a deviation pattern, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the present box effect (PBP-C) is executed at a rate of 10%. If the fluctuation pattern is a jackpot fluctuation pattern, the presence or absence of the present box effect (PBP-C) is determined at a rate of 60%.

Following step 006SHS124, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the present box effect (PBP-C) is determined to be executed (step 006SHS125). If it is determined that the present box effect (PBP-C) is to be executed (step 006SHS125; YES), the process proceeds to step 006SHS126. If it is not determined that the present box effect (PBP-C) is to be executed (step 006SHS125; NO), the process proceeds to step 006SHS130.

Following step 006SHS125 (YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the present box effect pattern “PBP-C” (step 006SHS126).

Following step 006SHS121 (NO), step 006SHS125 (NO), or step 006SHS126, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the character advance notice effect based on the fluctuation pattern (step 006SHS130). For example, as shown in FIG. 10-4 (A), if the fluctuation pattern is out of reach (either fluctuation pattern # 10 or # 11), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution is performed at a rate of 0%. However, if the fluctuation pattern is out of normal reach (variation pattern # 12), execution is determined at a rate of 0%, and if the fluctuation pattern is out of super reach (variation pattern # 13 or # 14), execution is possible. Is determined at a rate of 5%, and if the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach jackpot (fluctuation pattern # 16), the execution presence is determined at a rate of 0%, and the fluctuation pattern is either super reach jackpot (variation pattern # 17 or # 18). If), the execution status is determined at a rate of 75%.

Following step 006SHS130, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined that the character advance notice effect is to be executed (step 006SHS131). If it is determined that the character advance notice effect is to be executed (step 006SHS131; YES), the process proceeds to step 006SHS133. If it is not determined that the character advance notice effect is to be executed (step 006SHS131; NO), the process proceeds to step 006SHS140 of FIG. 10-17.

Following step 006SHS131 (YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-C" of the accessory advance notice effect (step 006SHS133).

Following step 006SHS133, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the present box effect (PBP-D) for the execution of the character advance notice effect (target) based on the fluctuation pattern (step 006SHS134). For example, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (D), if the fluctuation pattern is a deviation pattern, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the present box effect (PBP-D) is executed at a rate of 5%. If the fluctuation pattern is a jackpot fluctuation pattern, the presence or absence of execution of the present box effect (PBP-D) is determined at a rate of 80%.

Following step 006SHS134, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the present box effect (PBP-D) is determined to be executed (step 006SHS135). If it is determined that the present box effect (PBP-D) is to be executed (step 006SHS135; YES), the process proceeds to step 006SHS136. If it is not determined that the present box effect (PBP-D) is to be executed (step 006SHS135; NO), the process proceeds to step 006SHS140 of FIG. 10-17.

Following step 006SHS135 (YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the present box effect pattern “PBP-D” (step 006SHS136).

Following step 006SHS131 (NO), step 006SHS135 (NO), or step 006SHS136 of FIG. 10-16, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the pseudo continuous advance notice effect based on the fluctuation pattern (FIG. 10-). 17 steps 006SHS140). For example, as shown in FIG. 10-4 (B), if the fluctuation pattern is out of reach (either fluctuation pattern # 10 or # 11), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution is performed at a rate of 0%. However, if the fluctuation pattern is out of normal reach (variation pattern # 12), execution is determined at a rate of 0%, and if the fluctuation pattern is out of super reach (variation pattern # 13 or # 14), execution is possible. Is determined at a rate of 50%, and if the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach jackpot (fluctuation pattern # 16), the execution presence is determined at a rate of 25%, and the fluctuation pattern is either super reach jackpot (variation pattern # 17 or # 18). If), the execution status is determined at a rate of 60%.

Following step 006SHS140, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined that the pseudo-continuous notice effect is executed (step 006SHS141). If it is determined that the pseudo-continuous notice effect is to be executed (step 006SHS141; YES), the process proceeds to step 006SHS143. If it is not determined that the pseudo-continuous notice effect is to be executed (step 006SHS141; NO), this flowchart ends.

Following step 006SHS141 (YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the advance notice effect pattern “YEP-E” for the pseudo-continuous advance notice effect (step 006SHS143).

Following step 006SHS143, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the present box effect (PBP-E) targeting (targeting) the execution of the pseudo-continuous notice effect (step 006SHS144). For example, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (E), if the fluctuation pattern is a deviation pattern, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the present box effect (PBP-E) is executed at a rate of 25%. If the fluctuation pattern is a jackpot fluctuation pattern, the presence or absence of the present box effect (PBP-E) is determined at a rate of 60%.

Following step 006SHS144, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the present box effect (PBP-E) is determined to be executed (step 006SHS145). If it is determined that the present box effect (PBP-E) is to be executed (step 006SHS145; YES), the process proceeds to step 006SHS146. If it is not determined that the present box effect (PBP-E) is to be executed (step 006SHS145; NO), this flowchart ends.

Following step 006SHS145 (YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the present box effect pattern “PBP-E” (step 006SHS146). Then, this flowchart ends.

(Direction determination process B (Decision about setting suggestion effect)
FIG. 10-18 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect determination process B executed in the variable display start setting process of S171 in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. The effect determination process A described with reference to FIGS. 10-15 to 10-17 and the effect determination process B described with reference to FIG. 10-18 are executed first in the variable display start setting process (S171). You may.

In the effect determination process B shown in FIG. 10-18, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the thermal character effect based on the current set value and the fluctuation pattern (step 006SHS200). For example, in the effect control CPU 120, when the current set value is any one of 1 to 5, the fluctuation pattern is out of reach (variation patterns # 10, #) as shown in FIG. 10-9 (A). If it is any of 11), the execution presence is determined at a rate of 0%, if the fluctuation pattern is out of the normal reach (variation pattern # 12), the execution presence is determined at a rate of 1%, and the fluctuation pattern is Super Reach A. If it is out of order (fluctuation pattern # 13), it is determined that there is execution at a rate of 2%, and if the variation pattern is out of Super Reach B (variation pattern # 14), it is determined that there is execution at a rate of 2%. If is a normal reach jackpot (fluctuation pattern # 16), the execution presence is determined at a rate of 40%, and if the fluctuation pattern is a super reach A jackpot (fluctuation pattern # 17), the execution presence is determined at a rate of 60%. If the pattern is a super reach B jackpot (fluctuation pattern # 18), the execution presence is determined at a rate of 70%. On the other hand, when the current set value of the effect control CPU 120 is 6, the fluctuation pattern is out of reach (either of the fluctuation patterns # 10 and # 11) as shown in FIG. 10-9 (B). If so, the execution presence is determined at a rate of 0%, if the fluctuation pattern is out of normal reach (fluctuation pattern # 12), the execution presence is determined at a rate of 5%, and the fluctuation pattern is out of super reach A (variation pattern # 12). If it is 13), the execution presence is determined at a rate of 10%, if the fluctuation pattern is out of Super Reach B (variation pattern # 14), the execution presence is determined at a rate of 10%, and the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach jackpot (variation). If the pattern is # 16), the execution is determined at a rate of 40%, if the fluctuation pattern is Super Reach A jackpot (variation pattern # 17), the execution is determined at a rate of 60%, and the fluctuation pattern is Super Reach B. If it is a big hit (variation pattern # 18), the execution presence is determined at a rate of 70%.

Following step 006SHS200, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined that the thermal character effect is executed (step 006SHS201). If it is determined that the thermal character effect is to be executed (step 006SHS201; YES), the process proceeds to step 006SHS203. If it is not determined that the thermal character effect is to be executed (step 006SHS201; NO), the process proceeds to step 006SHS210.

Following step 006SHS201 (YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the setting suggestion effect pattern "SEP-ATU" for the thermal character effect (step 006SHS203).

Following step 006SHS201 (NO) or step 006SHS203, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the eye-catching effect based on the fluctuation pattern (step 006SHS210). For example, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (A), if the fluctuation pattern is out of super reach (fluctuation patterns # 13, # 14), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute at a rate of 100%. If it is not the case, the execution presence is determined at a rate of 0%.

Following step 006SHS210, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the eye-catching effect is determined to be executed (step 006SHS211). If it is determined that the eye-catching effect is to be executed (step 006SHS211; YES), the process proceeds to step 006SHS212. If it is not determined that the eye-catching effect is to be executed (step 006SHS211; NO), this flowchart ends.

Following step 006SHS211 (YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines the type of eye-catching effect (that is, the setting suggestion effect pattern) based on the current set value and the fluctuation pattern (step 006SHS212). For example, in the effect control CPU 120, when the current set value is any of 1 to 3, the fluctuation pattern is out of the super reach A (variation pattern # 13) as shown in FIG. 10-10 (B). If so, the setting suggestion effect pattern "SEP-EYE1 (normal eye-catching effect)" is determined at a rate of 90%, and the setting suggestion effect pattern "SEP-EYE2 (special eye-catching effect)" is determined at a rate of 10%. However, if the fluctuation pattern is out of Super Reach B (fluctuation pattern # 14), the setting suggestion effect pattern "SEP-EYE1 (normal eye-catching effect)" is determined at a rate of 95%, and the setting suggestion effect pattern "SEP-" is determined. EYE2 (special eye-catching effect) ”will be decided at a rate of 5%. On the other hand, in the effect control CPU 120, when the current set value is any of 4 to 6, the fluctuation pattern is out of the super reach A (variation pattern # 13) as shown in FIG. 10-10 (C). If so, the setting suggestion effect pattern "SEP-EYE1 (normal eye-catching effect)" is determined at a rate of 60%, and the setting suggestion effect pattern "SEP-EYE2 (special eye-catching effect)" is determined at a rate of 40%. However, if the fluctuation pattern is out of Super Reach B (fluctuation pattern # 14), the setting suggestion effect pattern "SEP-EYE1 (normal eye-catching effect)" is determined at a rate of 60%, and the setting suggestion effect pattern "SEP-" is determined. EYE2 (special eye-catching effect) ”will be decided at a rate of 40%.

Following step 006SHS212, the effect control CPU 120 sets the setting suggestion effect pattern (setting suggestion effect pattern "SEP-EYE1" or setting suggestion effect pattern "SEP-EYE2") of the eye-catching effect determined in step 006SHS212. (Step 006SHS213).

10-19 to 10-22 are diagrams showing an example of an effect operation related to the feature unit 006SH. Specifically, FIGS. 10-19 to 10-22 show the main scenes in the example shown in FIG. 10-12 (B) as an example, and FIG. 10-19 (A) → FIG. 10-19 (B)-> Fig. 10-19 (C)-> Fig. 10-20 (A)-> Fig. 10-20 (B)-> Fig. 10-20 (C)-> Fig. 10-21 (A)-> Fig. 10- The transition is in the order of 21 (B) → FIG. 10-21 (C) → FIG. 10-22 (A) → FIG. 10-22 (B) → FIG. 10-22 (C). In FIG. 10-19 (A) (the same applies to the other figures, the reference numerals are omitted in the other figures), the active display area 006 SHAHA, which is the active display display area, and the active display 006 SHAH displayed in the active display area 006 SHAHA are shown. Is displayed.

FIG. 10-19 (A) is a scene before reaching in the variable display. FIG. 10-19 (B) is a scene in which two present box images 006SHPB-CL are displayed (a scene of T1 in FIG. 10-12 (B)). The two present box images 006SHPB-CL displayed are not distinguished in terms of display mode, but are presents of the present box effect (PBP-B) for the execution of the group notice effect (YEP-B). The box image 006SHPB-CL, and the present box image 006SHPB-CL of the present box effect (PBP-E) for executing the pseudo-continuous notice effect (YEP-E). FIG. 10-19 (C) is a scene of reaching in the variable display.

FIG. 10-20 (A) shows a scene in which the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A2) is performed, that is, a scene in which the strong cut-in image 006SHYKE-KCI is displayed (T4 in FIG. 10-12 (B)). ~ T5 scene).

FIG. 10-20 (B) is a scene in which one present box image 006SHPB-CL is changed to a present box image 006SHPB-OP (a scene of T6 in FIG. 10-12 (B)). In the scene shown in FIG. 10-20 (B), the item corresponding to the change of the present box image 006SHPB-CL to the present box image 006SHPB-OP (corresponding to the opening of the present box) and corresponding to the group notice production. An image (an item image displayed as "group") is displayed.

FIG. 10-20 (C) shows a scene in which the group notice effect (YEP-B) is performed, that is, a scene in which the group image 006SHYKE-GN is displayed (T7 to T8 in FIG. 10-12 (B)). Scene). The present box image 006SHPB-OP (the same applies to the item image corresponding to the group notice effect) is deleted before the group notice effect (YEP-B) is executed (for example, immediately before T7). Further, the timing of erasing the present box image 006SHPB-OP and the item image to be deleted when the advance notice effect is executed does not have to be before the execution of the advance notice effect (for example, the execution start timing of the advance notice effect, the advance notice effect). It may be any timing during the execution of the above, the execution end timing of the advance notice effect, etc.).

FIG. 10-21 (A) is a scene in which one present box image 006SHPB-CL is changed to a present box image 006SHPB-OP (a scene of T9 in FIG. 10-12 (B)). In the scene of FIG. 10-21 (A), it corresponds to the change of the present box image 006SHPB-CL to the present box image 006SHPB-OP (corresponding to the opening of the present box), and corresponds to the pseudo-continuous notice production. The item image (the item image displayed as "re") is displayed.

10-21 (B) to 10-22 (B) are scenes in which a pseudo-continuous notice effect (YEP-E) is performed (scenes of T10 to T13 in FIG. 10-12 (B)). Further, FIG. 10-21 (C) is a scene in which the thermal character effect (SEP-ATU) is performed (scenes of T11 to T12 in FIG. 10-12 (B)). FIG. 10-22 (C) is a scene in which the jackpot symbol is displayed.

The temporary stop symbol 006SH-REP is displayed in FIGS. 10-21 (B) to 10-22 (A), and the revariable display is performed in FIG. 10-22 (B). Further, in FIG. 10-21 (C), the thermal character image 006SHSEP-ATU is also displayed in addition to the temporary stop symbol 006SH-REP, but the thermal character image 006SHSEP-ATU is on the front side of the temporary stop symbol 006SH-REP. It is displayed. That is, the hot character effect is executed with priority over the pseudo-continuous notice effect. In addition, in FIGS. 10-21 (B) to 10-22 (B), an example in which "temporary stop-> revariable display" is performed once as a pseudo-ream notice effect (YEP-E) is shown. As a notice effect (YEP-E), "temporary stop-> revariable display" may be performed twice or more.

10-23 to 10-25 are diagrams showing an example of an effect operation related to the feature unit 006SH. Specifically, FIGS. 10-23 to 10-25 show a part of the scenes in the example shown in FIG. 10-13 as an example, and FIG. 10-23 (A) → FIG. 10-. 23 (B) → FIG. 10-23 (C) → FIG. 10-24 (A) → FIG. 10-24 (B) → FIG. 10-24 (C) → FIG. 10-25 (A) → FIG. 10-25 ( B) → Transition in the order of FIG. 10-25 (C).

FIG. 10-23 (A) is a scene immediately before the development into super reach (super reach B) (a scene immediately before T14 in FIG. 10-13). In the variable display (variable display shown in FIG. 10-13), the present box effect (PBP) for executing the two present box images 006SHPB-CL (button notice effect (YEP-C)) is set in T1. -C) present box image 006SHPB-CL, present box image 006SHPB-CL of present box effect (PBP-E) for execution of pseudo-continuous notice effect (YEP-E) is displayed, but FIG. 10 In the scene of -23 (A) (the scene immediately before T14), the execution of the pseudo-continuous notice effect (YEP-E) has already been completed (in the scenes of T10 to T13), so one present box image 006SHPB. -CL (present box image 006SHPB-CL of present box effect (PBP-C) for executing button notice effect (YEP-C)) is displayed.

FIG. 10-23 (B) is a scene developed into super reach (a scene of T14 in FIG. 10-13).

FIG. 10-23 (C) is a scene in which one present box image 006SHPB-CL is changed to a present box image 006SHPB-OP (the scene of T15 in FIG. 10-13). In the scene of FIG. 10-23 (C), the item corresponding to the change of the present box image 006SHPB-CL to the present box image 006SHPB-OP (corresponding to the opening of the present box) and the button notice effect. An image (an item image on which a button image is drawn) is displayed.

10-24 (A) and 10-24 (B) are scenes in which the button notice effect (YEP-C1) is being performed (scenes T16 to T17 in FIG. 10-13). In FIG. 10-24 (A), the button image 006SHYKE-BU is displayed, and by pressing the button, the weak cut-in image 006SHYKE-JCI is displayed in FIG. 10-24 (A).

FIG. 10-24 (C) is a scene immediately before the outlier symbol is displayed in the super reach (super reach B) (a scene immediately before Ta21 in FIG. 10-13). 10-25 (A) and 10-25 (B) are scenes in which the out-of-order symbols are displayed (scenes of Ta21 to Ta22 in FIG. 10-13). In FIG. 10-25 (A), the small symbol "767" is displayed, and in FIG. 10-25 (B), the decorative symbol "767" is displayed.

FIG. 10-25 (C) is a scene (scenes of Ta22 to Ta23 of FIG. 10-13) in which a special eye-catching effect (SEP-EYE2) is performed. In FIG. 10-25 (C), an eye-catching image 006SHSEP-EYE2 (character image of a yukata with a goldfish pattern), which is a special aspect, is displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-25 (C), the small symbol "767" can be visually recognized while the eye-catching image 006SHSEP-EYE2 is being displayed (the same is true while the eye-catching image 006SHSEP-EYE1 (not shown) is being displayed). It has become. The "" "shown at the four corners of the numbers" 7 "," 6 ", and" 7 "of the small symbol" 767 "in FIG. 10-25 (C) indicates that the small symbol" 767 "is shaking. It was done. In addition, instead of or in addition to the small symbol "767" in FIG. 10-25 (C), the small symbol "767" in FIG. 10-25 (A) may also be shaken.

While the eye-catching image 006SHSEP-EYE2 is being displayed (the same applies to the eye-catching image 006SHSEP-EYE1 not shown), the reach-compatible small symbols (such as the above-mentioned shaking small symbol "767") are not displayed. It may be displayed so that a small symbol (a small symbol that is stopped and displayed by a symbol confirmation command) can be visually recognized at all times.

While the eye-catching image 006SHSEP-EYE2 is being displayed (the same applies to the eye-catching image 006SHSEP-EYE1 not shown), the active display 006SHAH, the hold display, and the number of hold display (the first corresponding to the first special figure game). The number of reserved storages, the number of second reserved storages corresponding to the second special figure game, which are indicated by numbers or the like) and the like may be displayed.

10-26 and 10-27 are diagrams showing an example of an effect operation related to the feature unit 006SH. Specifically, FIGS. 10-26 and 10-27 show a part of the scenes in the example shown in FIG. 10-14 as an example, and FIG. 10-26 (A) → FIG. 10-. The transition is in the order of 26 (B) → FIG. 10-26 (C) → FIG. 10-27 (A) → FIG. 10-27 (B) → FIG. 10-27 (C).

FIG. 10-26 (A) shows the present box image 006SHPB-CL of five present box images 006SHPB-CL (present box effect (PBP-A) for executing the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A)). Present box effect of present box effect (PBP-B) for execution of group notice effect (YEP-B) 006SHPB-CL, present box effect (PBP-) for execution of button advance notice effect (YEP-C) C) present box image 006SHPB-CL, present box effect (PBP-D) present box image 006SHPB-CL, pseudo-continuous advance notice effect (YEP-E) for the execution of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) This is a scene (the scene of T1 in FIG. 10-14) in which the present box image 006SHPB-CL) of the present box effect (PBP-E) for the execution of is displayed.

FIG. 10-26 (B) shows the present box image 006SHPB-CL of the last one present box image 006SHPB-CL (present box effect (PBP-D) for executing the character advance notice effect (YEP-D)). CL) is a scene immediately before changing to the present box image 006SHPB-OP (a scene immediately before T18 in FIG. 10-14).

FIG. 10-26 (C) is a scene in which the present box image 006SHPB-CL is changed to the present box image 006SHPB-OP (the scene of T18 in FIG. 10-14). In the scene of FIG. 10-26 (C), it corresponds to the change of the present box image 006SHPB-CL to the present box image 006SHPB-OP (corresponding to the opening of the present box), and corresponds to the character advance notice production. An item image (an item image on which the movable body 006SH32 is drawn) is displayed.

FIG. 10-27 (A) is a scene in which the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is being performed (scenes T19 to T20 in FIG. 10-14). In FIG. 10-27 (A), the movable body 006SH32 is operating.

10-27 (B) and (C) are scenes in which the jackpot symbol is displayed (scenes of Tb21 to Tb22 in FIG. 10-14). In FIG. 10-27 (B), the small symbol "777" is displayed, and in FIG. 10-27 (C), the decorative symbol "777" is displayed.

(Regarding a modified example of a gaming machine related to the feature unit 006SH)
Subsequently, a modified example of the gaming machine related to the feature unit 006SH will be described.

(Modification example 1 of feature unit 006SH)
In the above description, after the present box image 006SHPB-CL is changed to the present box image 006SHPB-OP (after the present box is opened), the present box image 006SHPB-OP and the item image are deleted. , One of the two may be erased, and the other may continue to be displayed without being erased. Moreover, you may continue to display both without erasing.

(Modification example 2 of feature unit 006SH)
In the above description, when the present box image 006SHPB-CL is changed to the present box image 006SHPB-OP, an example in which an item image corresponding to one notice effect actually executed is displayed (for example, FIG. 10-20 (for example, FIG. 10-20). In B), the item image corresponding to the group notice effect executed in FIG. 10-20 (C) is displayed, etc.), but a plurality of advance notice effects including one actually executed advance notice effect are described. The item image corresponding to may be displayed. For example, in FIG. 10-20 (B), an item image (for example, an item image indicated as “group / re” or the like) corresponding to the group notice effect and the pseudo-continuous notice effect may be displayed.

(Modification example 3 of feature unit 006SH)
In the above description, an example in which the item image is displayed when the present box image 006SHPB-CL changes to the present box image 006SHPB-OP has been described, but the present box image 006SHPB-CL has changed to the present box image 006SHPB-OP. Sometimes it is not necessary to display the item image. If the item image is displayed when the present box image 006SHPB-CL changes to the present box image 006SHPB-OP, the item image is displayed when the present box image 006SHPB-CL changes to the present box image 006SHPB-OP. The degree of expectation that will be a big hit may be different depending on when it is not done.

(Modification example 4 of feature unit 006SH)
In the above, an example in which the timing at which the present box image 006SHPB-CL is displayed is constant has been described, but the present box image 006SHPB-CL may be displayed at any timing of a plurality of types. Depending on the timing at which the present box image 006SHPB-CL is displayed, the degree of expectation of a big hit may be different.

(Variation example 5 of the feature portion 006SH)
In the above, when displaying a plurality of present box images 006SHPB-CL, an example of displaying a plurality of present boxes together has been described, but when displaying a plurality of present box images 006SHPB-CL, one present box is displayed. The image 006SHPB-CL may be displayed. The degree of expectation of a big hit may be different depending on whether a plurality of items are displayed together or one by one.

(Variation example 6 of the feature portion 006SH)
In the above, the present box image 006SHPB-CL is simply displayed (without performing any effect), but an example has been described. However, when the present box image 006SHPB-CL is displayed, the effect (for example, the character) is displayed. An effect of displaying the present box image 006SHPB-CL by magic or magic, an effect of the character carrying the present box image 006SHPB-CL, etc.) may be executed. The degree of expectation of a big hit may be different between when the present box image 006SHPB-CL is simply displayed and when the present box image 006SHPB-CL is displayed after the production. Further, there may be a case where the present box image 006SHPB-CL is displayed after the effect and a case where the present box image 006SHPB-CL is not displayed after the effect. For example, there may be a case where the magic succeeds and the present box image 006SHPB-CL is displayed, and a case where the magic fails and the present box image 006SHPB-CL is not displayed.

(Modification example 7 of feature unit 006SH)
In the above, the present box image 006SHPB-CL has been described as an example of displaying at the left end of the display area of the image display device 5, but may be displayed at another position. For example, it may be displayed in the vicinity of the active display area 006 SHAHA (see FIG. 10-19) (for example, the upper part of the active display 006 SHAH). In the case of a plurality, they may be displayed side by side in the vicinity of the active display area 006 SHAHA.

(Modification example 8 of feature unit 006SH)
In the above, although the execution timing and the like of each advance notice effect have been described with reference to FIG. 10-11, FIG. 10-11 is an example, and each effect may be executed at another execution timing.

As an example of the notice effect, the cut-in notice effect will be described. In the example of FIG. 10-11, the execution start timing of the cut-in notice effect is earlier than the execution start timing of the group notice effect, but the execution start of the cut-in notice effect. The timing may be later than the execution start timing of the group notice effect. Further, in the example of FIG. 10-11, the execution start timing of the cut-in notice effect is before the development, but the execution start timing of the cut-in notice effect may be after the development. Further, the cut-in notice effect may be executed at any one of a plurality of timings. The degree of expectation of a big hit may be different depending on the execution disclosure timing. Further, in the example of FIG. 10-11, the cut-in notice effect can be executed only once (although the execution start timing is only one place), but it may be executed twice or more (execution start). There may be two or more timings).

As an example of the setting suggestion effect, the thermal character effect will be described. In the example of FIG. 10-11, the execution start timing of the thermal character effect is later than the execution start timing of the group notice effect, but the execution start timing of the thermal character effect is. It may be earlier than the execution start timing of the group notice effect. Further, in the example of FIG. 10-11, the execution start timing of the hot character is before the development, but the execution start timing of the hot character may be after the development. The thermal character effect may be executed at any one of a plurality of timings. Further, in the example of FIG. 10-11, the thermal character effect can be executed only once (although the execution start timing is only one place), but it may be executed twice or more (execution start timing). There may be two or more places).

(Modification example 9 of the feature portion 006SH)
In the above, when the hot character effect and the pseudo-continuous notice effect overlap, the hot character effect is prioritized over the pseudo-continuous notice effect (“heat” is displayed on the front side, etc.), but an example has been described (Fig. 10-21). (C)), the same may be applied to the relationship between the heat character effect and other notice effects (excluding the character advance notice effects). That is, when the setting suggestion effect (heat character effect) and the advance notice effect (pseudo continuous advance notice effect, etc.) overlap, the setting suggestion effect may be prioritized.

(Modification example 10 of the feature portion 006SH)
In relation to the modification 9, when the setting suggestion effect and the advance notice effect overlap, the one with the shorter execution time may be preferentially executed. In the present embodiment, the execution time of the setting suggestion effect (heat character effect) and the notice effect (pseudo continuous notice effect, etc.) is shorter in the setting suggestion effect (heat character effect) (see FIG. 10-11). ), When the setting suggestion effect (heat character effect) and the advance notice effect (pseudo continuous advance notice effect, etc.) overlap, the setting suggestion effect is prioritized (see FIG. 10-21 (C)). Further, when the setting suggestion effect and the advance notice effect overlap, the one with the least appearance frequency may be preferentially executed. The frequency of appearance may be logical (calculated) or may be based on the actual operating status (on the day, etc.).

(Modification example 11 of the feature portion 006SH)
In the above, there is a thermal character effect (see FIG. 10-9) that suggests whether the set value is 1 to 5 or 6 and the set value is 1 to 3. An eye-catching effect (see FIG. 10-10) that suggests whether the set value is present or the set value is any of 4 to 6 has been described as a set value suggestion effect, but the suggestion target is not limited to the above. .. For example, it suggests whether it is an odd number setting (whether the set value is 1, 3, 5) or an even number setting (whether the set value is 2, 4, or 6). The setting suggestion effect may be executed. Also, for example, whether it is a low setting (set value is 1 or 2), a medium setting (set value is 3 or 4), or a high setting (set value is 5). Or is it?) May be executed.

(Modification example 12 of the feature portion 006SH)
In the above, the setting suggestion effects in which the suggestion targets (heat character effect: "1 to 5" or "6", eye-catching effect: "1 to 3" or "4 to 6") are different from each other have been described. The same different setting suggestion effect may be executed. For example, in a certain variation (for example, in super reach B (variation patterns # 14, # 18), only the effect A is executed, and only the effect B (the jackpot reliability is the same as the effect A) is executed. In some cases, neither A nor the effect B is executed, and as the effect mode of the effect A when the effect A is executed, when the setting value is 1, the effect A in the normal mode is 75% (the effect A in the special mode is 25). %), And when the set value is 6, the effect A in the normal mode is executed at a rate of 25% (the effect A in the special mode is 75%), and when the effect B is executed. As the effect mode of the effect B, when the set value is 1, the effect A in the normal mode is executed at a rate of 99% (the effect A in the special mode is 0.1%), and when the setting value is 6, the effect A in the normal mode is executed. The effect A may be executed at a rate of 1% (the effect A of the special aspect is 99.9%). According to the above, both the effect A and the effect B have the same suggestion target (“1 to 5”). "Or" 6 "), but the reliability of the set value suggestion (for example, the suggestion that the set value is" 6 ") is different between the effect A and the effect B. That is, the effect A in the normal mode. The reliability of the jackpot is the same when the effect A of the special aspect is executed, when the effect B of the normal aspect is executed, and when the effect B of the special aspect is executed, but the special aspect is special. When the effect B of the aspect is executed, the reliability (accuracy of suggestion) that the set value is 6 is higher than that when the effect A of the special aspect is executed.

(Modification example 13 of feature unit 006SH)
In the above, an example in which the set value suggestion effect suggests the current set value has been described, but it may suggest whether or not the set value is changed. The hot character effect (or eye-catching effect) may suggest whether or not the set value has been changed, or the setting suggestion effect different from the hot character effect or eye-catching effect suggests whether or not the set value has been changed. You may try to do it.

(Modification example 14 of feature unit 006SH)
In the above, the example in which the player's action is not involved when the set value suggestion effect is executed has been described, but the player's action may be involved when the set value suggestion effect is executed. As an example, a promotion effect that promotes the player's movement (button operation, screen touch, operation of a model (lever, sword, gun, etc.) provided on the outer frame, etc.) within a predetermined period before the start of execution of the heat character effect. May be executed to execute the heat character effect when the player moves within the predetermined period (when the player does not move within the predetermined period, the heat character effect is always performed. It may not be executed, and the thermal character effect may or may not be executed).

(Variation example 15 of the feature portion 006SH)
In the above, the eye-catching effect has been described as a setting suggestion effect that is not executed when a big hit occurs and is executed when a deviation occurs. Is not limited to eye-catching production. For example, in a scene where a friendly character is defeated by an enemy character in a battle super reach (for example, the scene shown in FIG. 10-25 (A)), the enemy character (or the dialogue of the friendly character) has one of a plurality of types of dialogue. It is also possible to execute the emitted dialogue effect and suggest the set value according to the type of the emitted dialogue and the like. For example, when the set value is any of 1 to 3, the line A is determined as the line of the enemy character at a rate of 65% and the line B is determined at a rate of 35%, and when the set value is any of 4 to 6, the enemy is determined. As the character's dialogue, dialogue A may be determined at a determination rate of 35%, and dialogue B may be determined at a determination ratio of 65%. For example, when the set value is any of 1 to 3, the line without dialogue is determined at 60%, the dialogue of the enemy character is determined at 30%, the dialogue of the ally character is determined at a determination rate of 10%, and the set value is any of 4 to 6. When this is the case, the dialogue of the enemy character may be determined by 60%, the dialogue of the enemy character may be determined by 10%, and the dialogue of the ally character may be determined by 30%.

From the scene where the ally character is defeated by the enemy character (for example, the scene shown in FIG. 10-25 (A)) to the scene where the ally character wins the enemy character (for example, the scene shown in FIG. 10-27 (B)). If there is a possibility that the transitional reversal effect will be executed, the above-mentioned dialogue effect may not be executed when the ally character is defeated by the enemy character. Alternatively, the above-mentioned dialogue effect may be executed after it is completely denied that the reverse effect is executed (timing after the timing at which the reverse effect is executed).

(Modification example 16 of feature unit 006SH)
In the above, the setting suggestion effect (eye catch effect) that is executed when the jackpot is hit and not executed, and the setting suggestion effect (heat character) that is executed both when the jackpot is hit and when the hit is missed. However, it is possible to provide a setting suggestion effect that is not executed when the game is out of order and is executed when the game is a big hit. For example, it is possible to execute a jackpot confirmation notification effect that notifies a jackpot during variable display, and there are a plurality of types of production modes of the jackpot confirmation notification effect, and when it is a special mode, a set value (or setting change) is suggested. You may do so.

As an example, it is possible to execute a definite notification effect that causes the game effect lamp 9 to emit light in rainbow colors during variable display, and when it is in a normal light emission mode (for example, blinking at a normal speed), a confirmation of a big hit is notified and a special light emission is performed. In the mode (for example, blinking of a special speed), the confirmation of the jackpot may be notified and the set value (or the setting change) may be suggested. As another example, it is possible to execute a definite notification effect (full rotation effect) in which the decorative symbols are rotated in a state where the numbers are aligned during the variable display, and a normal effect mode (for example, full rotation in the forward direction from top to bottom). When it is, the confirmation of the big hit is notified, and when it is a special effect mode (for example, full rotation in the reverse direction from the bottom to the top), the confirmation of the big hit is notified and the set value (or the setting change) is suggested. It may be.

(Modification example 17 of feature unit 006SH)
In the above, as the advance notice effect, the cut-in advance notice effect (YEP-A1, YEP-A2), the group advance notice effect (YEP-B), the button advance notice effect (YEP-C1, YEP-C2), and the character advance notice effect (YEP- D), an example of executing the pseudo-continuous advance notice effect (YEP-E) has been described, but the advance notice effect is not limited to this. For example, the development notice effect as shown in FIGS. 10-2 (D), (E), and (F) may be executed. In the example shown in FIGS. 10-2 (D), (E), and (F), the background image is cracked like glass during the reach, which develops into a super reach.

(Modification example 18 of feature unit 006SH)
In the above, for example, when the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A) is executed, the present box effect (PBP-A) targeting the execution of the cut-in notice effect (PBP-A) is executed. Although the example of executing the present box effect for the execution of the notice effect has been described, when the notice effect is executed, another effect may be executed for the execution of the notice effect. For example, in the case of executing the advance notice effect, the timer effect may be executed in place of or in addition to the present box effect for the execution of the advance notice effect.

For example, a timer image displaying the remaining time (see, for example, FIG. 10-5 (C)) is displayed, the remaining time is gradually reduced, and a timer image with zero remaining time (for example, FIG. 10-5 (D)) is displayed. ) Is displayed, the item image may be displayed (or the item image may not be displayed), and any of the advance notice effects may be executed. The degree of expectation of a big hit may be different between when the present box image 006SHPB-CL is displayed and when the timer image is displayed.

In addition, the present box image and the timer image may be displayed at the same time. For example, when two present box images are displayed when the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A) and the group notice effect (YEP) are executed (the present box image corresponding to the cut-in notice effect and the group notice). When the present box image corresponding to the effect is displayed) or when two timer images are displayed (the timer image corresponding to the cut-in notice effect and the timer image corresponding to the group notice effect are displayed). In addition to the case), when one present box image and one timer image are displayed (when the present box image corresponding to the cut-in notice effect and the timer image corresponding to the group notice effect are displayed, or There may be a timer image corresponding to the cut-in notice effect and a present box image corresponding to the group notice effect). In the case of executing a plurality of advance notice effects, the degree of expectation of a big hit may be different depending on whether the present box image and the timer image are displayed at the same time or not at the same time.

The timer in the timer image shown in FIGS. 10-5 (C) and 10-5 (D) is a digital timer (timer that displays the remaining time by a numerical value), but is a needle type (the remaining time is displayed by the position of the needle or the like). It may be a timer of the timer). Further, it does not have to be a timer as long as it indicates the remaining time (for example, it may be an hourglass or the like). Depending on which type (digital timer, hand timer, hourglass, etc.) is displayed, the degree of expectation of a big hit may be different.

When displaying a plurality of timer images, they may be displayed side by side (see, for example, FIG. 10-5 (E)), or the number of timer images may be displayed without being arranged (for example, FIG. 10-5 (F)). )reference). The number of present box images may be displayed without arranging them.

(Variation example 19 of the feature portion 006SH)
In the above embodiment, the set value is suggested by the hot character effect and the eye-catching effect, but the setting value is not limited to the hot character effect and the eye-catching effect.

As an example, the setting suggestion effect may be executed in an effect (for example, a mini character effect) performed before the reach or the period before the pseudo-continuous temporary stop. The present box effect or the like may not be executed for the setting suggestion effect (that is, the present box may not be opened and suggested that the mini character effect or the like is executed).

As another example, the set value may be suggested by the present box effect. Specifically, for example, in the present box production, in addition to the present box image of the normal mode (see FIGS. 10-5 (A) and (B)), the present box image of the special aspect (for example, FIG. 10-5 (G)). (See (H)) can be displayed, the present box image in the normal mode suggests the execution of any notice effect, and the present box image in the special mode suggests the execution of any notice effect and the set value (or). , Setting change) may be suggested. The present box image 006SHPB2-CL of FIG. 10-5 (G) has a different display mode (pattern in this example) from the present box image 006SHPB-CL of FIG. 10-5 (A). The present box image 006SHPB2-OP of FIG. 10-5 (H) has a different display mode (pattern in this example) from the present box image 006SHPB-CL of FIG. 10-5 (B).

As another example, the set value may be suggested by the timer effect. Specifically, for example, in the timer effect, in addition to the timer image of the normal mode (see FIGS. 10-5 (C) (D)), the timer image of the special mode (for example, FIGS. 10-5 (I) (J)) (See) can be displayed, the timer image in the normal mode suggests the execution of any notice effect, and the timer image in the special mode suggests the execution of any notice effect and the set value (or setting change) is set. You may suggest it. The timer image of FIG. 10-5 (I) is different from the timer image of FIG. 10-5 (C) in the display mode (presence or absence of a bell in this example). The timer image of FIG. 10-5 (J) is different from the timer image of FIG. 10-5 (D) in the display mode (presence or absence of a bell in this example).

(Modification example 20 of feature unit 006SH)
In the above, the present box image (present box effect) is determined in the variable display start setting process (step S171) (see FIGS. 7, 10-16, 10-17), but the pre-reading notice setting process (see FIG. 7, FIG. 10-16, FIG. 10-17). The present box image may be determined in step S161). In the mode of determining the present box image in the variable display start setting process (step S171), the present box image is determined based on whether or not the advance notice effect is executed and the fluctuation pattern (see FIG. 10-7). When determining the present box image in the reading notice setting process (step S161), based on the contents of the received symbol specification command (see FIG. 8-16) and variable category specification command (see FIG. 8-16). You may decide on the present box image. It should be noted that a plurality of present box images may be collectively determined in the pre-reading notice setting process at the time of one start winning, or one present box image may be determined in the pre-reading notice setting process at the time of each start winning. May be good. That is, a plurality of present box images may be associated with one variation, or one present box image may be associated with each variation.

In addition, "suggestion of setting value" is only to recognize that there is a high possibility that it is a certain setting value (or a setting value within a certain range), and that it is a certain setting value (or a setting value within a certain range). It may not be deterministically notified, or it may be deterministically notified that it is a certain set value (or a set value within a certain range). For example, by making sure that a certain effect or a certain display is not determined when the setting is low (for example, a setting value of 3 or less), the effect or the display or the like is set to a high setting (for example, a setting value of 4 or less). It will definitely notify you of the fact.

In the above description, since the display result (missing, big hit) is included in the fluctuation pattern (for example, the fluctuation pattern # 13 includes not only the execution of the super reach A but also the deviation), and the fluctuation pattern # 17 uses a variation pattern (contents of a variation pattern specification command) without using a display result (contents of a variable display result notification command, etc.) and a big hit in addition to the execution of Super Reach A). As a result, various effects (notice effect, present box effect, setting suggestion effect, etc.) are determined (for example, FIG. 10-3, FIG. 10-4, FIG. 10-7, FIG. 10-9, FIG. 10-. 10), various effects (notice effect, present box effect, setting suggestion effect, etc.) may be determined by using the display result (contents of the variable display result notification command, etc.).

(Application to other devices)
In the above, an example of applying to a pachinko gaming machine has been described, but it can also be applied to a slot machine. For example, in a certain state (for example, a state that is not an advantageous state), whether to shift to another state (for example, an advantageous state) periodically (for each fixed number of games, for each number of games within a predetermined range) is determined from the normal time. In slot machines that draw lots with a high probability, multiple types of advance notice effects with different expectations for transition to other states and specific displays (present box image, timer image, etc.) corresponding to the advance notice effects to be executed are displayed. The specific effect to be displayed can be executed, and the setting suggestion effect can be executed when the setting suggestion effect is not controlled by another state (advantageous state). There are cases where the specific display corresponding to the notice effect is not displayed before the execution of the notice effect, and when the specific display corresponding to the notice effect is displayed before the execution of the notice effect, the specific display is displayed before the execution of the notice effect. When the display mode of is changed to a special mode and the specific display corresponding to the notice effect is displayed before the advance notice effect is executed, the specific display corresponding to the notice effect is not displayed before the advance notice effect is executed. The ratio of being controlled to another state (advantageous state) is higher than that of the time, and when the setting suggestion effect is executed, the specific display may not be displayed corresponding to the setting suggestion effect.

Alternatively, in the slot machine that draws with high probability whether to shift to the second advantageous state (for example, AT state, ART state, etc.) in the first advantageous state (for example, CZ, bonus game, etc.), the first In the advantageous state, it is possible to execute multiple types of advance notice effects with different expectations for transition to the second advantageous state, and specific effects that display specific displays (present box image, timer image, etc.) in response to the advance notice effects. It is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect when the second advantageous state is not controlled, and when the specific display corresponding to the advance notice effect is displayed before the advance notice effect is executed and when the advance notice effect is executed. There are cases where the specific display corresponding to is not displayed, and when the specific display corresponding to the notice effect is displayed before the advance notice effect is executed, the display mode of the specific display is changed to a special mode before the advance notice effect is executed. , When the specific display corresponding to the notice effect is displayed before the execution of the notice effect, the second advantageous state is set as compared with the case where the specific display corresponding to the notice effect is not displayed before the execution of the notice effect. When the rate of control is high and the setting suggestion effect is executed, the specific display may not be displayed in response to the setting suggestion effect.

(Explanation of means relating to feature unit 006SH)
(Means 1 relating to feature unit 006SH)
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, a slot machine, etc.) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit game state, bonus game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player, and the player has a disadvantage setting value and the disadvantage setting value. A setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values including an advantageous setting value having a high degree of advantage for the player, and an effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 or the like) capable of executing the effect. , The effect executing means includes a plurality of types of advance notice effects (for example, the cut-in advance notice effect and the group advance notice effect shown in FIG. 10-1), and a specific display corresponding to the advance notice effect (for example, FIG. The specific effect of displaying the present box image, timer image, etc. shown in 10-5 can be executed, and the setting suggestion effect related to the setting means (for example, the special eye catch shown in FIG. 10-8 (A)) can be executed. The effect can be executed when the advantageous state is not controlled (for example, Ta22 to Ta23 can be executed as shown in FIGS. 10-11), and the advance notice effect is supported before the advance notice effect is executed. There are cases where the specific display is displayed and cases where the specific display corresponding to the notice effect is not displayed before the advance notice effect is executed (for example, whether or not the present box effect shown in FIG. 10-7 is executed). (Refer to the determination ratio), when the specific display corresponding to the notice effect is displayed before the execution of the notice effect, the display mode of the specific display is changed to a special mode before the execution of the notice effect (for example, FIG. As shown in 10-6, the present box image 006SHPB-CL is changed to the present box image 006SHPB-OP), and it is better when the specific display corresponding to the advance notice effect is displayed before the execution of the advance notice effect. The ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the specific display corresponding to the notice effect is not displayed before the advance notice effect is executed (for example, whether or not the present box effect shown in FIG. 10-7 is executed). (Refer to the determination ratio), when the setting suggestion effect is executed, the specific display is not displayed corresponding to the setting suggestion effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-11, a cut-in notice effect and a group notice). The present box is applicable to the production, pseudo-continuous advance notice effect, button advance notice effect, and character advance notice effect, but the hot character effect and eye-catching effect are not the target of the present box).

According to the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game. That is, if the setting suggestion effect is included as the target of the specific display, the player guesses that the setting suggestion effect does not control the advantageous state, and the player's expectation is reduced, which makes the game more enjoyable. However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, since the setting suggestion effect is not included as the target of the specific display, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

(Means 2 pertaining to feature unit 006SH)
The gaming machine of the means 1 is not executed when it is controlled to the advantageous state, and can be executed when it is not controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the eye-catching effect shown in FIG. 10-10). Etc.) and the second setting suggestion effect (for example, the thermal character effect shown in FIG. 10-9) that can be executed both when the advantageous state is controlled and when the advantageous state is not controlled. It is possible.

According to the above-mentioned gaming machine, since it is possible to execute a plurality of types of setting suggestion effects having different executable scenes, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. It should be noted that the gaming machine of the means 1 is not executed when it is not controlled in the advantageous state, but can be executed when it is controlled in the advantageous state (for example, the definite notification illustrated in the modified example). It may be possible to execute (directing, etc.).

(Means 3 pertaining to feature unit 006SH)
The gaming machine of the means 1 or the means 2 has a plurality of types of the setting suggestion effects (for example, the thermal character effect shown in FIG. 10-9 and the eye catch shown in FIG. 10-10) having different accuracy of the suggestion regarding the setting means. (Direction, etc.) can be executed.

According to the above-mentioned gaming machine, since it is possible to execute a plurality of types of setting suggestion effects having different suggestion accuracy, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Means 4 pertaining to feature unit 006SH)
The gaming machines of the means 1 to the means 3 can execute variable display of the identification information, and include a look-ahead determination means for determining whether or not the identification information is controlled to the advantageous state, and the specific display is based on the look-ahead determination. (For example, the display of the present box image may be determined in the pre-reading notice setting process (step S161)).

According to the game machine, for example, a specific display can be displayed before the start of the fluctuation based on the look-ahead determination, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

(Means 5 pertaining to feature unit 006SH)
The gaming machines of the means 1 to the means 4 can display a plurality of the specific displays (see, for example, FIGS. 10-19 (B) and 10-25 (A)), and the number of displays of the specific display is a plurality. It is easier to control the advantageous state than the singular.

According to the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is possible to pay attention to the number of displays of a specific display and improve the interest of the game.

(Means 6 for Feature Unit 006SH)
The gaming machines of the means 1 to the means 5 have a plurality of types of display modes of the specific display (see, for example, FIG. 10-5), and may make suggestions regarding the setting means according to the display mode of the specific display. ..

According to the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is possible to pay attention to the display mode of the specific display and improve the interest of the game.

(Means 7 for Feature Unit 006SH)
The gaming machines of means 1 to 6 have an execution period of the advance notice effect (for example, an execution period of the pseudo-continuous advance notice effect of FIG. 10-11) and an execution period of the setting suggestion effect (for example, FIG. 10-11). When the execution period of the heat character effect of the above overlaps with that of the above-mentioned advance notice effect, the setting suggestion effect is preferentially executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (C), "heat" is changed to "heat". Displayed on the front side of "Re").

According to the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is possible to prevent the disadvantage caused by overlooking the suggestion.

(Means 8 for Feature Unit 006SH)
In the gaming machines of the means 1 to the means 7, the determination of whether to execute the setting suggestion effect and the determination of whether to execute the advance notice effect are independently performed. For example, whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed is determined by the effect determination process B (see FIG. 10-18), and whether or not the advance notice effect is executed is determined by the effect determination process A (see FIGS. 10-15 to 10-17). Will be done.

According to the above-mentioned gaming machine, the setting suggestion effect and the advance notice effect can be suitably executed. It also facilitates design.

(Means 9 for Feature Unit 006SH)
The gaming machines of the means 1 to the means 8 can execute the variable display of the identification information, and may be able to execute the setting suggestion effect at a plurality of timings within the variable display period of the identification information.

According to the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is possible to pay attention to a plurality of timings and improve the interest of the gaming. Further, since it can be executed at a plurality of timings, it is possible to maintain the expectation that the setting suggestion effect will be executed.

1 Pachinko game machine 4A 1st special symbol display device 4B 2nd special symbol display device 5 Image display device 103 CPU
120 Production control CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values including a disadvantage setting value and an advantage setting value having a higher advantage for the player than the disadvantage setting value, and
A production execution means that can execute a production,
With
The effect executing means is
It is possible to execute a plurality of types of advance notice effects and a specific effect of displaying a specific display corresponding to the advance notice effect.
The setting suggested presentation relating to the setting means is capable of running,
There are a case where the specific display corresponding to the advance notice effect is displayed before the execution of the advance notice effect and a case where the specific display corresponding to the advance notice effect is not displayed before the execution of the advance notice effect. when prior to execution displaying the specific display which corresponds to the informational display, the varying special embodiment a specific display of the display mode before execution of the announcement attraction,
During one variable display, the advance notice effect, the specific effect corresponding to the advance notice effect, and the setting suggestion effect can be executed.
The advantageous state when the specific display corresponding to the advance notice effect is displayed before the execution of the advance notice effect is more than when the specific display corresponding to the advance notice effect is not displayed before the execution of the advance notice effect. Highly controlled by
When in one of the variable display, wherein the specific effect which corresponds to the informational display and the informational display, and the setting suggested effect, is performed,
The specific display is not displayed in response to the setting suggestion effect,
When the specific display changes to the special mode, the setting suggestion effect is not executed, and the setting suggestion effect is not executed.
A gaming machine characterized in that the setting suggestion effect is executed after a lapse of a predetermined period after the specific display is changed to the special mode and then hidden.

Images